1. Home
  2. Honda
  3. Honda ACCORD HYBRID 2007 User Manual

Honda Accord Hybrid 2007

Product's Documents

Below are documents related to this product, you can read online or download:
User Manual Other Documents
Main documentSpecificationQuestions and answersRelateds Products

User Manual

This is the main product document for model ACCORD HYBRID 2007.

The file format is pdf, 287 pages, you can download this manual here .

background
2007 Accord Hybrid Online Reference Owner's Manual
Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.
For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.
Contents
Owner's Identification Form
Introduction..................................................................................................................................................... i
A Few Words About Safety ..........................................................................................................................iii
Your Vehicle at a Glance...............................................................................................................................4
Driver and Passenger Safety .......................................................................................................................7
Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System.
Instruments and Controls...........................................................................................................................57
Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls.
Comfort and Convenience Features.......................................................................................................105
How t
o operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features.
Before Driving ..............................................................................................................................
...............155
What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo.
Driving...........................................................................................................................................................169
The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer.
Maintenance.................................................................................................................................................191
T
he Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer.
Taking Care of the Unexpected...............................................................................................................233
This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them.
Technical Information...............................................................................................................................257
ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information.
Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada)......................................................................271
A summary of the warranties covering your new Honda, and how to contact us.
Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...............................................................................................................275
How t
o order manuals and other technical literature.
Index .................................................................................................................................................................I
Service Information Summary
A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.
background
The information and specifications included
in this publication were in effect at the time
of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,
Ltd. reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications or
design at any time without notice and
without incurring any obligation whatsoever.
This owner’s manual should be considered
a permanent part of the vehicle and should
remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
This owner’s manual covers all models of
the Accord Hybrid. You may find
descriptions of equipment and features that
are not on your particular model.
Owner’s Identification
OWNER
ADDRESS
V. I. N.
DELIVERY DATE
DEALER NAME DEALER NO.
ADDRESS
OWNER’S SIGNATURE
DEALER’S SIGNATURE
STREET
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
(Date sold to original retail purchaser)
STREET
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
06/08/08 14:14:30 31SDR620_001
Main Menu
▲
▼
background
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so
youcanrefertoitatanytime.
Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
As you read this manual, you will
find information that is preceded by
a symbol. This
information is intended to help you
avoid damage to your vehicle, other
property, or the environment.
Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance minder shown in the
instrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves
your investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that
your dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique
to your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be
pleased to answer any questions and concerns.
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2007 Honda Accord Hybrid was a wise
investment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.
Introduction
i
06/08/08 14:14:37 31SDR620_002
Main Menu
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
background
California Proposition 65 Warning
This product contains or emits chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. These devices
record front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failure of any airbag
system component. This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else except as legally
required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.
Service Diagnostic Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data
can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may
also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential and is never linked to
the vehicle owner.
Introduction
WARNING:
ii
06/08/08 14:14:42 31SDR620_003
Main Menu
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
background
−
−
−
−
−
−
To help you make informed
decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in
this manual. This information alerts
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
Your safety, and the safety of others,
is very important. And operating this
vehicle safely is an important
responsibility.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or
maintaining your vehicle. You must
use your own good judgement.
This entire book is filled with important safety information please read it
carefully.
how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
These signal words mean:
preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of
three signal words: , , or .
on the vehicle.
Instructions
Safety Section
Safety Headings
Safety Messages
Safety Labels
AFewWordsAboutSafety
DANGER WARNING CAUTION
iii
You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
instructions.
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
06/08/08 14:14:56 31SDR620_004
Main Menu
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
background
How to operate the heating and air
conditioning system, the audio
system, and other convenience
features.
A convenient reference to the
sections in this manual.
A quick reference to the main
controls in your vehicle.
Explains the purpose of each
instrument panel indicator and gauge,
and how to use the controls on the
dashboard and steering column.
ID numbers, dimensions, capacities,
and technical information.
How to order manuals and other
technical literature.
A summary of the information you
need when you pull up to the fuel
pump.
The proper way to start the engine,
shift the transmission, and park; plus
what you need to know if you’re
planning to tow a trailer.
What gasoline to use, how to break-
in your new vehicle, and how to load
luggage and other cargo.
The maintenance minder shows you
when you need to take your vehicle
to the dealer for maintenance service.
There is also a list of things to check
and instructions on how to check
them.
This section covers several problems
motorists sometimes experience,
and details how to handle them.
Important information about the
proper use and care of your vehicle’s
seat belts, an overview of the
supplemental restraint system (SRS),
and valuable information on how to
protect children with child restraints.
A summary of the warranties
covering your new vehicle, and how
to contact us for any reason. Refer to
your warranty manual for detailed
information.
Overview of Contents
Contents
Your Vehicle at a Glance
Driver and Passenger Safety
Instruments and Controls
Features
Technical Information
Warranty and Customer
Relations
(U.S. and Canada only)
Authorized Manuals
(U.S. only)
Index
Service Inf ormation Summary
Maintenance
Driving
Before Driving
Taking Care of the Unexpected
3
06/08/08 14:15:36 31SDR620_008
Main Menu
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
background
Your Vehicle at a Glance
4
MIRROR CONTROLS
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS
INDICATORS
TRUNK RELEASE LEVER
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
AUDIO SYSTEM
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
(P.60)
GAUGES(P.67)
(P.93)
(P.84)
(P.94)
(P.88)
(P.157)
(P.158)
(P.100)
(P.172)
(P.106)
(P.118)
FUEL FILL DOOR
RELEASE LEVER
SHIFT LEVER
PARKING BRAKE
(P.98)
(P.11, 24)
DRIVER’S FRONT AIRBAG
PASSENGER’S FRONT AIRBAG
(P.11, 24)
06/08/08 14:15:43 31SDR620_009
Main Menu
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
background
＊
＊
Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.:
Your Vehicle at a Glance
Your Vehicle at a Glance
5
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BRIGHTNESS
VOICE CONTROL
SWITCHES
HEADLIGHTS/
TURN SIGNALS
REMOTE AUDIO
CONTROLS
HORNSTEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENT
CRUISE CONTROLS
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
HAZARD
WARNING BUTTON
VSA OFF SWITCH
MOONROOF
SWITCH
WINDSHIELD
WIPERS/WASHERS
PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR
(P.78)
(P.75)
(P.33)
(P.79)
(P.147)
(P.79, 109, 112)
(P.80)
(P.184)
(P.97)
(P.143)
(P.76)
06/08/08 14:15:50 31SDR620_010
Main Menu
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
background
▲
▼
background
−
This section gives you important
information about how to protect
yourself and your passengers. It
shows you how to use seat belts. It
explains how your airbags work. And
it tells you how to properly restrain
infants and children in your vehicle.
.........Important Safety Precautions . 8
.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 9
.....................................Seat Belts . 10
.........................................Airbags . 11
.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 13
.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 13
...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 13
............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 14
...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 15
5. Fasten and Position the Seat
.....................................Belts . 16
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting
................................Position . 17
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 18
...Additional Safety Precautions . 19
Additional Information About Your
.................................Seat Belts . 20
..Seat Belt System Components . 20
......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 21
Automatic Seat Belt
...............................Tensioners . 22
...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 23
Additional Information About Your
.....................................Airbags . 24
......Airbag System Components . 24
How Your Front Airbags
.........................................Work . 26
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 29
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
.........................................Work . 31
..How the SRS Indicator Works . 31
How the Side Airbag Off
......................Indicator Works . 32
How the Passenger Airbag Off
......................Indicator Works . 33
.............................Airbag Service . 34
...Additional Safety Precautions . 35
Protecting Children General
................................Guidelines . 36
All Children Must Be
...............................Restrained . 36
All Children Should Sit in a
.................................Back Seat . 37
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
................Poses Serious Risks . 37
If You Must Drive with Several
...................................Children . 39
If a Child Requires Close
..................................Attention . 39
...Additional Safety Precautions . 40
Protecting Infants and
.........................Small Children . 41
.......................Protecting Infants . 41
.........Protecting Small Children . 42
.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 43
....................Installing a Child Seat . 44
Installing a Child Seat
............................with LATCH . 45
......with a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 47
...........................with a Tether . 49
...........Protecting Larger Children . 50
...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 50
..................Using a Booster Seat . 51
When Can a Larger Child
...............................Sit in Front . 52
...Additional Safety Precautions . 53
.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 54
...................................Safety Labels . 55
Driver and Passenger Safety
Driver and Passenger Safety
7
06/08/08 14:15:57 31SDR620_012
Main Menu
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
background
−
You’ll find many safety
recommendations throughout this
section, and throughout this manual.
Therecommendationsonthispage
are the ones we consider to be the
most important.
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed, the greater the
risk, but serious injuries can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current
conditions, regardless of the
maximum speed posted.
Having a tire blowout or a
mechanical failure can be extremely
hazardous. To reduce the possibility
of such problems, check your tire
pressures and condition frequently,
and perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance (see page ).
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of collisions. Airbags are
designed to supplement seat belts,
not replace them. So even though
your vehicle is equipped with airbags,
make sure you and your passengers
always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly (see page ).
Children age 12 and under should
ride properly restrained in a back
seat. Infants and small children
should be restrained in a child seat.
Larger children should use a booster
and a lap/shoulder belt until they
canusethebeltproperlywithouta
booster (see pages ).
While airbags can save lives, they
can cause serious or fatal injuries to
occupants who sit too close to them,
or are not properly restrained.
Infants, young children, and short
adults are at the greatest risk. Be
sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even
one drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions, and
your reaction time gets worse with
every additional drink. So don’t drink
and drive, and don’t let your friends
drink and drive, either.
16
191
36
53
Important Safety Precautions
Always Wear Your Seat Belt
Control Your Speed
Keep Your Vehicle in Saf e
Condition
Restrain All Children
Be Aware of Airbag Hazards
Don’t Drink and Drive
8
06/08/08 14:16:10 31SDR620_013
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
background
Your vehicle is equipped with many
features that work together to
protect you and your passengers
during a crash.
The following pages explain how you
cantakeanactiveroleinprotecting
yourself and your passengers.
However, you and your passengers
can’t take full advantage of these
features unless you remain sitting in
a proper position and
. In fact, some safety
features can contribute to injuries if
they are not used properly.
Some features do not require any
action on your part. These include a
strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger
compartment, front and rear crush
zones, a collapsible steering column,
and tensioners that tighten the front
seat belts in a crash.
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
always wear
your seat belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
9
(1)
(2)
(2)
(3) (4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(7)
(10)
(11)
(9)
(8)
(1) Safety Cage
(2) Crush Zones
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs
(4) Head Restraints
(5) Collapsible Steering Column
(6) Seat Belts
(7) Front Airbags
(8) Side Airbags
(9) Side Curtain Airbags
(10) Door Locks
(11) Seat Belt Tensioners
06/08/08 14:16:19 31SDR620_014
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Your vehicle is equipped with seat
belts in all seating positions.
Seat belts are the single most
effectivesafetydeviceforadultsand
larger children. (Infants and smaller
children must be properly restrained
in child seats.)
In addition, most states and all
Canadian provinces require you to
wear seat belts.
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
Keep you connected to the vehicle
so you can take advantage of the
vehicle’s built-in safety features.
When properly worn, seat belts:
Help keep you from being thrown
against the inside of the vehicle
and against other occupants.
Keep you from being thrown out
of the vehicle.
Help keep you in a good position
should the airbags ever deploy. A
good position reduces the risk of
injury from an inflating airbag and
allows you to get the best
advantage from the airbag.
Of course, seat belts cannot
completely protect you in every
crash.Butinmostcases,seatbelts
can reduce your risk of serious
injury.
Always wear your seat belt, and
make sure you wear it properly.
Your seat belt system also
includes an indicator on the
instrument panel and a beeper to
remind you and your passengers to
fasten your seat belts.
Help protect you in almost every
type of crash, including frontal,
side, and rear impacts, and
rollovers.
Seat Belts
Why Wear Seat Belts
What You Should Do:
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
10
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
Be sure you and your
passengers always wear seat
belts and wear them properly.
06/08/08 14:16:34 31SDR620_015
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
CONTINUED
Your vehicle has a supplemental
restraint system (SRS) with front
airbags to help protect the heads and
chests of the driver and a front seat
passenger during a moderate to
severe frontal collision (see page
for more information on how
your front airbags work).
In addition, your vehicle has side
curtain airbags to help protect the
heads of the driver, front passenger,
and passengers in the outer rear
seating positions during a moderate
to severe side impact (see page
for more information on how
your side curtain airbags work).
Your vehicle has side airbags to help
protect the upper torso of the driver
or a front seat passenger during a
moderate to severe side impact (see
page for more information on how
your side airbags work).
26 31
29
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
11
06/08/08 14:16:43 31SDR620_016
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
The most important things you need
to know about your airbags are:
Always wear
your seat belt properly, and sit
upright and as far back from the
steering wheel as possible while
allowing full control of the vehicle. A
front passenger should move their
seat as far back from the dashboard
as possible.
The rest of this section gives more
detailed information about how you
can maximize your safety.
Remember, however, that no safety
system can prevent all injuries or
deaths that can occur in a severe
crash, even when seat belts are
properly worn and the airbags deploy.
They are designed to supplement
the seat belts.
To do their job, airbags must
inflate with tremendous force. So
while airbags help save lives, they
can cause minor injuries or more
serious or even fatal injuries if
occupants are not properly
restrained or sitting properly.
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
What you should do:
Airbags do not replace seat belts.
Airbags offer no protection in rear
impacts, or minor f rontal or side
collisions.
Airbags can pose serious hazards.
12
06/08/08 14:16:51 31SDR620_017
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
−
CONTINUED
Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the
rear as possible while allowing you to
maintain full control of the vehicle.
Have a front passenger adjust their
seat as far to the rear as possible.
Locking the doors reduces the
chance of someone being thrown out
of the vehicle during a crash, and it
helps prevent passengers from
accidentally opening a door and
falling out.
Locking the doors also helps prevent
an outsider from unexpectedly
opening a door when you come to a
stop.
The following pages provide
instructions on how to properly
protect the driver, adult passengers,
and teenage children who are large
enough and mature enough to drive
or ride in the front.
See pages for important
guidelines on how to properly
protect infants, small children, and
larger children who ride in your
vehicle.
After everyone has entered the
vehicle, be sure the doors are closed
and locked.
See page for how to lock the
doors, and page for how the door
monitor indicator works.
Your vehicle has a door and
trunk open monitor on the
instrument panel to indicate when a
specific door or the trunk is not
tightly closed.
36 53
84
62
Protecting Adults and Teens
Introduction Adjust the Front Seats
Close and Lock the Doors1.
2.
Driver and Passenger Safety
13
06/08/08 14:17:05 31SDR620_018
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
If you sit too close to the steering
wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front
airbag, or by striking the steering
wheel or dashboard.
Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
comfortable, upright position,
leaving ample space between your
chest and the airbag cover in the
center of the steering wheel.
Passengers with adjustable seat-
backs should also adjust their seat-
back to a comfortable, upright
position.
If you cannot get far enough away
from the steering wheel and still
reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some
type of adaptive equipment may help.
After the passenger’s seat is
adjusted correctly, it should be
rocked back and forth to make sure
it is locked in position.
See page for how to adjust the
front seats.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that drivers
allow at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest. In addition to
adjusting the seat, you can adjust the
steering wheel up and down, and in
and out (see page ).80
90
Protecting Adults and Teens
Adjust the Seat-Backs3.
14
Sitting too close to a front
airbag can result in serious
injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the
front airbags as possible.
06/08/08 14:17:16 31SDR620_019
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Adjust the driver’s head restraint so
the back of your head rests against
the center of the restraint.
Have passengers with adjustable
head restraints adjust their restraints
properly as well. Taller persons
should adjust their restraint as high
as possible.
Properly adjusted head restraints
will help protect occupants from
whiplash and other crash injuries.
See page for how to adjust the
head restraints.
See page for how to adjust the
seat-backs.
Reclining a seat-back so that the
shoulder part of the belt no longer
rests against the occupant’s chest
reduces the protective capability of
the belt. It also increases the chance
of sliding under the belt in a crash
and being seriously injured. The
farther a seat-back is reclined, the
greater the risk of injury.
90
92
Protecting Adults and Teens
Adjust the Head Restraints4.
Driver and Passenger Safety
15
Reclining the seat-back too far
can result in serious injury or
death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an
upright position, and sit well
back in the seat.
Improperly positioning head
restraints reduces their
effectiveness, and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are
in place and positioned properly
before driving.
06/08/08 14:17:27 31SDR620_020
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
If the seat belt touches or crosses
your neck, or if it crosses your arm
instead of your shoulder, you need to
adjust the seat belt anchor height.
Insert the latch plate into the buckle,
then tug on the belt to make sure the
belt is securely latched. Check that
the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash.
This spreads the forces of a crash
over the strongest bones in your
upper body.
Position the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of
the belt so the lap part fits snugly.
This lets your strong pelvic bones
take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
If necessary, pull up on the belt again
to remove any slack, then check that
the belt rests across the center of
your chest and over your shoulder.
Protecting Adults and Teens
Fasten and Position the Seat
Belts
5.
16
Improperly positioning the seat
belts can cause serious injury
or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are
properly positioned before
driving.
06/08/08 14:17:36 31SDR620_021
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
After all occupants have adjusted
their seats and put on seat belts, it is
very important that they continue to
sit upright, well back in their seats,
with their feet on the floor, until the
vehicle is parked and the engine is
off.
Sitting improperly can increase the
chance of injury during a crash. For
example, if an occupant slouches,
lies down, turns sideways, sits
forward, leans forward or sideways,
or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is
greatly increased.
This could cause
very serious injuries in a crash.
See page for additional
information about your seat belts
and how to take care of them.
If a seat belt does not seem to work
properly, it may not protect the
occupant in a crash.
Using a seat
belt that is not working properly can
result in serious injury or death.
Have your dealer check the belt as
soon as possible.
The front seats have adjustable seat
belt anchors. To adjust the height of
an anchor, squeeze the two release
buttons, and slide the anchor up or
down as needed (it has four
positions).
20
CONTINUED
Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position
6.
Protecting Adults and Teens
Never place the shoulder portion of a
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or
behind your back.
No one should sit in a seat with an
inoperative seat belt.
Driver and Passenger Safety
17
RELEASE
BUTTONS
06/08/08 14:17:47 31SDR620_022
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
When driving, remember to sit
upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full
control of the vehicle. When riding
as a front passenger, adjust the seat
as far back as possible.
This will reduce the risk of injuries
to both you and your unborn child
that can be caused by a crash or an
inflating front airbag.
Each time you have a checkup, ask
your doctor if it’s okay for you to
drive.If you are pregnant, the best way to
protect yourself and your unborn
child when driving or riding in a
vehicle is to always wear a seat belt,
and keep the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across the hips.
In addition, an occupant who is out of
position in the front seat can be
seriously or fatally injured in a crash
by striking interior parts of the
vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.
Protecting Adults and Teens
Advice for Pregnant Women
18
Sitting improperly or out of
position can result in serious
injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in
the seat, with your feet on the
floor.
06/08/08 14:17:56 31SDR620_023
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
If your
hands or arms are close to an
airbag cover, they could be injured
if the airbag inflates.
Objects on
the covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’
could interfere with the proper
operation of the airbags or be
propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Carrying hard or sharp
objects on your lap, or driving with
a pipe or other sharp object in
your mouth, can result in injuries
if your front airbag inflates.
Devices intended to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt can
reduce the protective capability of
thebeltandincreasethechanceof
serious injury in a crash.
If a side airbag or a
side curtain airbag inflates, a cup
holder or other hard object
attached on or near the door could
be propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone.
Protecting Adults and Teens
Keep your hands and arms away
from the airbag covers.
Do not attach or place objects on
the front airbag covers.
Two people should never use the
same seat belt.
Do not place hard or sharp objects
between yourself and a f ront
airbag.
Do not put any accessories on seat
belts.
Do not attach hard objects on or
near a door.
Additional Safety Precautions
Driver and Passenger Safety
19
06/08/08 14:18:04 31SDR620_024
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Your seat belt system includes lap/
shoulder belts in all five seating
positions. The front seat belts are
also equipped with automatic seat
belt tensioners.
This system monitors the front seat
belts. If you turn the ignition switch
to the ON (II) position before your
seat belt is fastened, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash. If
your seat belt is not fastened before
the beeper stops, the indicator will
stop flashing but remain on.This system uses the same sensors
as the front airbags to monitor
whether the front seat belts are
latched or unlatched, and how much
weight is on the front passenger’s
seat (see pages and ).
The seat belt system
includes an indicator on the
instrument panel and a beeper to
remind you and your passengers to
fasten your seat belts.
If a front passenger does not fasten
their seat belt, the indicator will
come on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
If either the driver or a front
passenger does not fasten their seat
belt while driving, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals.
When no one is sitting in the front
passenger’s seat, or a child or small
adult is riding there, the indicator
should not come on and the beeper
should not sound.
28 29
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt System Components
20
06/08/08 14:18:12 31SDR620_025
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
All seat belts have an emergency
locking retractor. In normal driving,
the retractor lets you move freely in
your seat while it keeps some
tension on the belt. During a collision
or sudden stop, the retractor
automatically locks the belt to help
restrain your body.
The lap and shoulder belt goes over
your shoulder, across your chest,
and across your hips.
To fasten the belt, insert the latch
plate into the buckle, then tug on the
belt to make sure the buckle is
latched (see page for how to
properly position the belt).
To unlock the belt, press the red
PRESSbuttononthebuckle.Guide
the belt across your body so that it
retracts completely. After exiting the
vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the
way and will not get closed in the
door.
Any items under the front
passenger’s seat.
Any objects hanging on the seat or
in the seat-back pocket.
If the indicator comes on or the
beeper sounds when the driver’s seat
belt is latched and there is no front
seat passenger and no items on the
front seat, something may be
interfering with the monitoring
system. Look for and remove:
If no obstructions are found, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Any object touching the rear of
the seat-back.
16
CONTINUED
Lap/Shoulder Belt
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
21
06/08/08 14:18:22 31SDR620_026
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
If a side airbag or side curtain airbag
deploys during a side impact, the
tensioner on that side of the vehicle
will also deploy.
The tensioners can also be activated
during a collision in which the front
airbags . In this case, the
airbags would not be needed, but the
additional restraint could be helpful.
When the tensioners are activated,
the seat belts will remain tight until
they are unbuckled.
The tensioners are designed to
activate in any collision severe
enough to cause the front airbags to
deploy.
For added protection, the front seat
belts are equipped with automatic
seat belt tensioners. When activated,
the tensioners immediately tighten
the belts to help hold the driver and
a front passenger in position.
The seat belts in all positions except
the driver’s have an additional
lockable retractor that must be
activated to secure a child seat (see
page ).
If the shoulder part of the belt is
pulled all the way out, the lockable
retractor will activate. The belt will
retract, but it will not allow the
passenger to move freely.
To deactivate the lockable retractor,
unlatch the buckle and let the seat
belt fully retract. To refasten the
seat belt, pull it out only as far as
needed.
47
do not deploy
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
22
06/08/08 14:18:33 31SDR620_027
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
If a seat belt is worn during a crash,
it must be replaced by your dealer. A
belt that has been worn during a
crash may not provide the same level
of protection in a subsequent crash.
The dealer should also inspect the
anchors for damage and replace
them if needed. If the automatic seat
belt tensioners activate during a
crash, they must be replaced.
For safety, you should check the
condition of your seat belts regularly.
Pull each belt out fully, and look for
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
that the latches work smoothly and
the belts retract easily. If a belt does
not retract easily, cleaning the belt
may correct the problem (see page
). Any belt that is not in good
condition or working properly will
not provide good protection and
should be replaced as soon as
possible.
Honda provides a limited warranty
on seat belts. See your
booklet for
details.
219
Honda
Warranty Information
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt Maintenance
Driver and Passenger Safety
23
Not checking or maintaining
seat belts can result in serious
injury or death if the seat belts
do not work properly when
needed.
Check your seat belts regularly
and have any problem
corrected as soon as possible.
06/08/08 14:18:42 31SDR620_028
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Your airbag system includes:
Two SRS (supplemental restraint
system) front airbags. The driver’s
airbag is stored in the center of
the steering wheel; the front
passenger’sairbagisstoredinthe
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG’’ (see page ).
Two side airbags, one for the
driver and one for a front
passenger. The airbags are stored
in the outer edges of the seat-
backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDE
AIRBAG’’ (see page ).
Two side curtain airbags, one for
each side of the vehicle. The
airbags are stored in the ceiling
above the side windows. The front
and rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDE
CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page
).
26
29
31
Airbag System Components
Additional Information About Your Airbags
24
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(8)
(7)
(10)
(11)
(9)
(6)
(4)
(7)
(8)
(5)
(10)
(11) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors
(1) Driver’s Airbag
(2) Front Passenger’s Airbag
(3) Control Unit
(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(5) Side Airbags
(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor
(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors
(8) Front Impact Sensors
(9) Passenger’s Airbag Off Indicator
(10) Side Impact Sensors
06/08/08 14:18:52 31SDR620_029
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Automatic front seat belt
tensioners (see page ).
Sensors that can detect a
moderate to severe front impact or
side impact.
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
turned off (see page ).
Emergency backup power in case
your vehicle’s electrical system is
disconnected in a crash.
Sensors that can detect whether a
child is in the passenger’s side
airbag path and signal the control
unit to turn the airbag off (see
page ).
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you to a possible
problem with your airbags,
sensors, or seat belt tensioners
(see page ).
A sophisticated electronic system
that continually monitors and
records information about the
sensors, the control unit, the
airbag activators, the seat belt
tensioners, and driver and front
passenger seat belt use when the
ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position.
Sensors that monitor the weight
on the front passenger’s seat. If
the weight is about 65 lbs (29 kg)
or less (the weight of an infant or
small child), the passenger’s front
airbag will be turned off (see page
).
A driver’s seat position sensor that
monitors the distance of the seat
from the front airbag. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force (see page
).
Sensors that can detect whether
the driver’s seat belt and a front
passenger’s seat belt is latched or
unlatched (see page ).
An indicator on the dashboard that
alerts you that the passenger’s
front airbag has been turned off
(see page ).
20
22
28
28
31
33
32
30
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
25
06/08/08 14:19:03 31SDR620_030
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
After inflating, the front airbags will
immediately deflate, so they won’t
interfere with the driver’s visibility,
or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
The total time for inflation and
deflation is one-tenth of a second, so
fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until
they see them lying in their laps.
During a frontal crash, your seat belt
restrains your lower body and torso,
and the front airbag helps protect
your head and chest.
Although both airbags normally
inflate within a split second of each
other, it is possible for only one
airbag to deploy.
This can happen if the severity of a
collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
such cases, the seat belt will provide
sufficient protection, and the
supplemental protection offered by
the airbag would be minimal.
If you ever have a moderate to
severe frontal collision, sensors will
detect the vehicle’s rapid
deceleration.
If the rate of deceleration is high
enough, the control unit will instantly
inflate the driver’s and front
passenger’s airbags, at the time and
with the force needed.
Only the driver’s airbag can deploy if
there is no passenger in the front
seat, or if the advanced airbag
system has turned the passenger’s
airbag off (see page ).28
How Your Front Airbags Work
Additional Information About Your Airbags
26
06/08/08 14:19:13 31SDR620_031
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Your front airbags are also dual-
threshold airbags. Airbags with this
feature have two deployment
thresholds that depend on whether
sensors detect the occupant is
wearing a seat belt or not.
If the occupant’s belt is ,
the airbag will deploy at a slightly
lower threshold, because the
occupant would need extra
protection.
Your front airbags are dual-stage
airbags. This means they have two
inflation stages that can be ignited
sequentially or simultaneously,
depending on crash severity.
In a crash, both stages
will ignite simultaneously to provide
the quickest and greatest protection.
In a crash, one stage will
ignite first, then the second stage
will ignite a split second later. This
provides longer airbag inflation time
with a little less force.
After a crash, you may see what
looks like smoke. This is actually
powder from the airbag’s surface.
Although the powder is not harmful,
people with respiratory problems
mayexperiencesometemporary
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
If the occupant’s belt is , the
airbag will inflate at a slightly higher
threshold, when the airbag would be
needed to supplement the protection
provided by the seat belt.
CONTINUED
Dual-Threshold Airbags
not latched
Dual-Stage Airbags
more severe
less severe
latched
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
27
06/08/08 14:19:25 31SDR620_032
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Your front airbags are also advanced
airbags. The main purpose of this
feature is to help prevent airbag-
caused injuries to short drivers and
children who ride in front.
For both advanced airbags to work
properly:
Occupants must sit upright and
wear their seat belts properly.
Back-seat passengers should not
put their feet under the front seats.
Failure to follow these instructions
could damage the sensors or prevent
them from working properly.
The driver’s advanced front airbag
system includes a seat position
sensor under the seat. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force, regardless of
the severity of the impact.
If there is a problem with the sensor,
the SRS indicator will come on, and
the airbag will inflate in the normal
manner regardless of the driver’s
seating position.
The passenger’s advanced front
airbag system has weight sensors
under the seat. Although Honda
does not encourage carrying an
infant or small child in front, if the
sensors detect the weight of an
infant or small child (up to about 65
lbs or 29 kg), the system will
automatically turn the passenger’s
front airbag off.
Be aware that objects placed on the
passenger’s seat can also cause the
airbag to be turned off.
Do not spill any liquids on or
under the seats, cover the sensors,
or put any objects or metal items
under the front seats.
Advanced Airbags
Additional Information About Your Airbags
28
DRIVER’S
SEAT
POSITION
SENSOR
PASSENGER’S
SEAT WEIGHT
SENSOR
06/08/08 14:19:38 31SDR620_033
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
If you ever have a moderate to
severe side impact, sensors will
detect rapid acceleration and signal
the control unit to instantly inflate
either the driver’s or the passenger’s
side airbag and activate the seat belt
tensioner on the affected side.
When the airbag is turned off, a
‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator in
the center of the dashboard comes
on (see page ).
If the weight sensors detect that
there is no passenger in the front
seat, the airbag will be off. However,
the Passenger Airbag Off indicator
will not come on.
To ensure that the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system will
work properly,
This includes:
A rear passenger pushing or
pulling on the back of the front
passenger’s seat.
Moving the front seat forcibly
back against cargo on the seat or
floor behind it.
Hanging heavy items on the front
passenger seat, or placing heavy
items in the seat-back pocket.
Also,makesurethefloormatbehind
the front passenger’s seat is hooked
to the floor mat anchor (see page
). If it is not, the mat may
interfere with the proper operation
of the sensors and operation of the
seat.
33
219
CONTINUED
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How Your Side Airbags Work
do not do anything
that would increase or decrease the
weight on the front passenger’s seat.
Driver and Passenger Safety
29
06/08/08 14:19:50 31SDR620_034
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Only one airbag will deploy during a
side impact. If the impact is on the
passenger’s side, the passenger’s
side airbag will deploy even if there
is no passenger.
To get the best protection from the
side airbags, front seat occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoff
system designed primarily to protect
a child riding in the front passenger’s
seat.
Although Honda does not encourage
children to ride in front, if the height
and position sensors in the seat
detect a child has leaned into the
side airbag’s deployment path, the
airbag will shut off.
Thesideairbagmayalsoshutoffifa
short adult leans sideways, or a
larger adult slouches and leans
sideways into the airbag’s
deployment path.
Objects placed on the front
passenger seat can also cause the
side airbag to be shut off.
If the side airbag off indicator comes
on (see page ), have the
passenger sit upright. Once the
passenger is out of the airbag’s
deployment path, the system will
turn the airbag back on, and the
indicator will go out.
There will be some delay between
the moment the passenger moves
into or out of the airbag deployment
pathandwhentheindicatorcomes
on or goes off.
A front seat passenger should not
use a cushion or other object as a
backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
system from working properly.
32
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Side Airbag Cutoff System
30
06/08/08 14:20:00 31SDR620_035
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
CONTINUED
In a moderate to severe side impact,
sensors will detect rapid acceleration
and signal the control unit to
instantly inflate the side curtain
airbag and activate the seat belt
tensioner on the driver’s or the
passenger’s side of the vehicle.
If the impact is on the passenger’s
side, the passenger’s side curtain
airbag will inflate even if there are no
occupants on that side of the vehicle.
To get the best protection from the
side curtain airbags, occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, this indicator
comes on briefly then goes off. This
tells you the system is working
properly.
The SRS indicator alerts
you to a potential problem
with your airbags or seat belt
tensioners.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work
How the SRS Indicator Works
Driver and Passenger Safety
31
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
06/08/08 14:20:11 31SDR620_036
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
This indicator
alerts you that the
passenger’s side
airbag has been automatically shut
off. It does mean there is a
problem with your side airbags.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the indicator
should come on briefly and then go
out(seepage ).Ifitdoesn’tcome
on, stays on, or comes on while
driving without a passenger in the
front seat, have the system checked.
If the indicator comes on at any
other time, or does not come on at all,
you should have the system checked
by your dealer. For example:
If the SRS indicator does not come
on after you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
If the indicator stays on after the
engine starts.
If the indicator comes on or
flashesonandoffwhileyoudrive.
If you see any of these indications,
the airbags and seat belt tensioners
may not work properly when you
need them.
61
How the Side Airbag Off
Indicator Works
not
Additional Information About Your Airbags
32
CanadaU.S.
Ignoring the SRS indicator can
result in serious injury or death
if the airbag systems or
tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer as soon as possible if
the SRS indicator alerts you to
a possible problem.
06/08/08 14:20:23 31SDR620_037
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
This indicator alerts you that the
passenger’s front airbag has been
shut off because weight sensors
detect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less
(the weight of an infant or small
child) on the front passenger’s seat.
It does there is a problem
with the airbag.
The passenger airbag off indicator
maycomeonandoffrepeatedlyif
the total weight on the seat is near
the airbag cutoff threshold.
Be aware that objects placed on the
front seat can cause the indicator to
come on.
If the indicator comes on with no
front seat passenger and no objects
on the seat, or with an adult riding
there, something may be interfering
with the weight sensors. Look for
and remove:
Any items under the front
passenger’s seat.
Any object hanging on the seat or
in the seat-back pocket.
If no weight is detected on the front
seat, the airbag will be automatically
shut off. However, the indicator will
not come on.
If an adult or teenage passenger is
riding in front, move the seat as far
to the rear as possible, and have the
passenger sit upright and wear the
seat belt properly.
Any object touching the rear of
the seat-back.
If no obstructions are found, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer as
soon as possible.
How the Passenger Airbag Of f
Indicator Works
not mean
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
33
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
Canada
U.S.
06/08/08 14:20:36 31SDR620_038
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as
possible. If you ignore this
indication, your airbags may not
operate properly.
Your airbag systems are virtually
maintenance free, and there are no
parts you can safely service.
However, you must have your
vehicle serviced if:
Do not try to remove or replace
anyairbagbyyourself.Thismust
be done by an authorized dealer or
a knowledgeable body shop.
Any airbag
that has deployed must be
replaced along with the control
unit and other related parts. Any
seat belt tensioner that activates
must also be replaced.
Even if your
airbags do not inflate, your dealer
should inspect the driver’s seat
position sensor, the front
passenger’s weight sensors, the
front seat belt tensioners, and all
seat belts worn during the crash to
make sure they are operating
properly.
The SRS indicator alerts you to a
problem.
An airbag ever inflates.
If your vehicle has a moderate to
severe impact.
Airbag Service
Additional Information About Your Airbags
34
06/08/08 14:20:43 31SDR620_039
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Together, airbags and
seat belts provide the best
protection.
Tampering could cause
the airbags to deploy, possibly
causing very serious injury.
Improperly replacing
or covering front seat-back covers
can prevent your side airbags from
inflating during a side impact.
If water or
another liquid soaks into the seat-
back, it can prevent the side airbag
cutoff system from working
properly.
This could make the
driver’s seat position sensor or the
front passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective. If it is necessary to
remove or modify a front seat to
accommodate a person with
disabilities, first contact Honda
Automobile Customer Service at
(800) 999-1009.
Additional Safety Precautions
Donotattempttodeactivateyour
airbags.
Do not tamper with airbag
components or wiring for any
reason.
Do not cover or replace f ront seat-
back covers without consulting
your dealer.
Do not expose the front passenger’s
seat-back to liquid.
Do not remove or modify a front
seat without consulting your
dealer.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
35
06/08/08 14:20:50 31SDR620_040
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
−
−
−
If you have children, or ever need to
drive with a child in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section. It begins
with important general guidelines,
then presents special information for
infants, small children, and larger
children.
To reduce the number of child
deaths and injuries, every state and
Canadian province requires that
infants and children be properly
restrained when they ride in a
vehicle.
(see pages ).
(see pages ).
Children depend on adults to protect
them. However, despite their best
intentions, many adults do not know
how to protect child
passengers.
Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because
they are either unrestrained or not
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle
accidents are the number one cause
of the death of children aged 12 and
under.
49
50 53
41
properly
All Children Must Be Restrained
Infants and small children must be
restrained in an approved child seat
that is properly secured to the
vehicle
Larger children must be restrained
with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on
a booster seat until the seat belt fits
them properly
Protecting Children General Guidelines
36
Children who are unrestrained
or improperly restrained can be
seriously injured or killed in a
crash.
Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
restrained in a child seat. A
larger child should be properly
restrained with a seat belt and
use a booster seat if necessary.
06/08/08 14:21:01 31SDR620_041
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
−
Front airbags have been designed to
help protect adults in a moderate to
severe frontal collision. To do this,
the passenger’s front airbag is quite
large, and it can inflate with enough
force to cause very serious injuries.
If the vehicle seat is
too far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can strike the
child with enough force to kill or
very seriously injure a small child.
Whenever possible,
larger children should sit in the back
seat, on a booster seat if needed, and
be properly restrained with a seat
belt (see page for important
information about protecting larger
children).
According to accident statistics,
children of all ages and sizes are
safer when they are restrained in a
back seat.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
aged 12 and under be properly
restrained in a back seat. Some
states have laws restricting where
children may ride.
Children who ride in the back are
less likely to be injured by striking
interior vehicle parts during a
collision or hard braking. Also,
children cannot be injured by an
inflating front airbag when they ride
in the back.
Even though your vehicle has an
advanced front airbag system that
automatically turns the passenger’s
front airbag off (see page ),
please follow these guidelines:
If
the airbag inflates, it can hit the back
of the child seat with enough force
to kill or very seriously injure an
infant.
33
50
CONTINUED
Small Children
Placing a f orward-f acing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag can
be hazardous.
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown child
seats are also at risk of being injured
or killed by an inf lating passenger’s
front airbag.Infants
Never put a rear-f acing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag.
All Children Should Sit in a Back
Seat
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Poses Serious Risks
Protecting Children General Guidelines
Driver and Passenger Safety
37
06/08/08 14:21:16 31SDR620_042
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
−
To remind you of the passenger’s
front airbag hazards, and that
children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has
warninglabelsonthedashboard
(U.S. model) and on the front visors.
Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
U.S. Model:
Canadian Model:
Protecting Children General Guidelines
38
DASHBOARD
SUN VISORS
SUN VISORS
06/08/08 14:21:33 31SDR620_043
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
−
Many parents say they prefer to put
an infant or a small child in the front
passenger seat so they can watch the
child, or because the child requires
attention.
Placing a child in the front seat
exposes the child to hazards in a
frontal collision, and paying close
attention to a child distracts the
driver from the important tasks of
driving, placing both of you at risk.
Your vehicle has a back seat where
children can be properly restrained.
If you ever have to carry a group of
children, and a child must ride in
front:
Place the largest child in the front
seat, provided the child is large
enough to wear the lap/shoulder
belt properly (see page ).
Move the vehicle seat as far to the
rear as possible (see page ).
Have the child sit upright and well
backintheseat(seepage ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly
positioned and secured (see page
).
If a child requires close physical
attention or frequent visual
contact, we strongly recommend
that another adult ride with the
child in a back seat. The back seat
is far safer for a child than the
front.
16
13
17
50
If a Child Requires Close
Attention
If You Must Drive with Several
Children
Protecting Children General Guidelines
Driver and Passenger Safety
39
06/08/08 14:21:43 31SDR620_044
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
−
During a crash, the
belt could press deep into the child
and cause serious or fatal injuries.
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Children
who play in vehicles can
accidentally get trapped inside.
Teach your children not to play in
or around vehicles. Know how to
operate the emergency trunk
opener and decide if your children
should be shown how to use this
feature(seepage ).
Even very young
children learn how to unlock
vehicle doors, turn on the ignition
switch, and open the trunk, which
can lead to accidental injury or
death.
If you are not wearing a
seat belt in a crash, you could be
thrown forward and crush the
child against the dashboard or a
seat-back. If you are wearing a
seat belt, the child can be torn
from your arms and be seriously
hurt or killed.
This can prevent children
from accidentally falling out (see
page ).
Leaving children without
adult supervision is illegal in most
states and Canadian provinces,
and can be very hazardous.
For example, infants and small
childrenleftinavehicleonahot
day can die from heatstroke. A
child left alone with the key in the
ignition switch can accidentally set
the vehicle in motion, possibly
injuring themselves or others.
If a child wraps a loose
seat belt around their neck, they
can be seriously or fatally injured.
(See pages and for how to
activate and deactivate the
lockable retractor.)
85
47 48
89
Additional Safety Precautions
Never put a seat belt over yourself
and a child.
Never let two children use the
same seat belt.
Lock all doors and the trunk when
your vehicle is not in use.
Keep vehicle keys and remote
transmitters out of the reach of
children.
Neverholdaninfantorchildon
your lap.
Use childproof door locks to
prevent children from opening the
doors.
Do not leave children alone in a
vehicle.
Make sure any unused seat belt
that a child can reach is buckled,
the lockable retractor is activated,
and the belt is fully retracted and
locked.
Protecting Children General Guidelines
40
06/08/08 14:21:54 31SDR620_045
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
An infant must be properly
restrained in a rear-facing, reclining
child seat until the child reaches the
seat maker’s weight or height limit
for the seat, and the child is at least
one year old.
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back.
Two types of seats may be used: a
seat designed exclusively for infants,
or a convertible seat used in the rear-
facing, reclining mode.
If placed
facing forward, an infant could be
very seriously injured during a
frontal collision.
A rear-facing child seat can be placed
in any seating position in the back
seat, but not in the front.
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates, it can hit the back of the
child seat with enough force to kill or
seriously injure an infant.
When properly installed, a rear-
facing child seat may prevent the
driver or a front passenger from
moving their seat as far back as
recommended, or from locking their
seat-back in the desired position.
It can also interfere with proper
operation of the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system.
CONTINUED
Protecting Infants
Child Seat Type
Do not put a rear-f acing child seat in
a forward-facing position.
Never put a
rear-f acing child seat in the f ront
seat.
Rear-f acing Child Seat Placement
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
41
06/08/08 14:22:07 31SDR620_046
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
A child who is at least 1 year old, and
who fits within the child seat maker’s
weight and height limits, should be
restrained in a forward-facing,
upright child seat.
Of the different seats available, we
recommend those that have a five-
point harness system as shown.
In any of these situations, we
strongly recommend that you install
the child seat directly behind the
front passenger’s seat, move the seat
as far forward as needed, and leave it
unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get
a smaller rear-facing child seat.
If the vehicle seat is too
farforward,orthechild’sheadis
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating airbag can strike the child
with enough force to cause very
serious or fatal injuries.
We strongly recommend placing a
forward-facing child seat in a back
seat, not the front.
We also recommend that a small
child use the child seat until the child
reaches the weight or height limit
for the seat.
Protecting Small Children
Child Seat Type
Placing a f orward-f acing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s airbag can be
hazardous.
Child Seat Placement
Protecting Infants and Small Children
42
Placing a rear-facing child seat
in the front seat can result in
serious injury or death during a
collision.
Always place a rear-facing child
seat in the back seat, not the
front.
06/08/08 14:22:19 31SDR620_047
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Conventional child seats must be
secured to a vehicle with a seat belt,
whereas LATCH-compatible seats
are secured by attaching the seat to
hardware built into the two outer
seating positions in the back seat.
Since LATCH-compatible child seats
are easier to install and reduce the
possibility of improper installation,
we recommend selecting this style.
We also recommend selecting a
LATCH-compatible seat with a rigid,
rather than a flexible, anchor (see
page ).
In seating positions and vehicles not
equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-
compatible child seat can be installed
using a seat belt.
Whatever type of seat you choose, to
provide proper protection, a child
seat should meet three
requirements:
Look for FMVSS
213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.
Rear-facing for infants, forward-
facing for small children.
When buying a child seat, you need
to choose either a conventional child
seat, or one designed for use with
the lower anchors and tethers for
children (LATCH) system.
If it is necessary to put a forward-
facing child seat in the front, move
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as
possible, and be sure the child seat is
firmly secured to the vehicle and the
child is properly strapped in the seat.
Even with advanced front airbags
that automatically turn the
passenger’s front airbag off (see
page ), a back seat is the safest
place for a small child.
1.
2.
45
33
CONTINUED
Selecting a Child Seat
The child seat should meet U.S. or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213.
The child seat should be of the
proper type and size to f it the child.
Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat
Driver and Passenger Safety
43
Placing a forward-facing child
seat in the front seat can result
in serious injury or death if the
front airbag inflates.
Ifyoumustplaceaforward-
facing child seat in front, move
the vehicle seat as far back as
possible, and properly restrain
the child.
06/08/08 14:22:33 31SDR620_048
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
After selecting a proper child seat
and a good place to install the seat,
there are three main steps in
installing the seat:
All child seats must be
secured to the vehicle with the lap
part of a lap/shoulder belt or with
the LATCH (lower anchors and
tethers for children) system. A
child whose seat is not properly
secured to the vehicle can be
endangered in a crash.
After installing a child
seat, push and pull the seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
A child seat secured with a seat belt
should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, it does not need
to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side
movement can be expected and
should not reduce the child seat’s
effectiveness.
If the child seat is not secure, try
installing it in a different seating
position, or use a different style of
child seat that can be firmly secured.
Before purchasing a conventional
child seat, or using a previously
purchased one, we recommend that
you test the seat in the specific
vehicle seating position or positions
where the seat will be used.
Make sure the child is properly
strappedinthechildseat
according to the child seat maker’s
instructions. A child who is not
properly secured in a child seat
canbeseriouslyinjuredinacrash.
The following pages provide
guidelines on how to properly install
a child seat. A forward-facing child
seat is used in all examples, but the
instructions are the same for rear-
facing child seats.
3.
1.
2.
3.
Installing a Child Seat
Properly secure the child seat to
the vehicle.
Make sure the child seat is firmly
secured.
The child seat should fit the
vehicle seating position (or
positions) where it will be used.
Secure the child in the child seat.
Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat
44
06/08/08 14:22:45 31SDR620_049
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Make sure there are no objects
near the anchors that could
prevent a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors.
Move the seat belt buckle or
tongue away from the lower
anchors.
To install a LATCH-compatible child
seat:
Place the child seat on the vehicle
seat, then attach the seat to the
lower anchors according to the
child seat maker’s instructions.
Some LATCH-compatible seats
have a rigid-type connection as
shown above.
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (lower anchors and tethers
for children) at the outer rear seats.
The lower anchors are located
between the seat-back and seat
bottom, and are to be used only with
a child seat designed for use with
LATCH.
The location of each lower anchor is
indicated by a small button above the
anchor point.
1.
2.
3.
CONTINUED
Installing a Child Seat with
LATCH
Installing a Child Seat
Driver and Passenger Safety
45
Rigid type
LOWERANCHORMARKS
06/08/08 14:22:57 31SDR620_050
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Other LATCH-compatible seats
have a flexible-type connection as
shown above.
Whatever type you have, follow
the child seat maker’s instructions
for adjusting or tightening the fit.
Pushandpullthechildseat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
Lift the head restraint (see page
), then route the tether strap
through the legs of the head
restraint, making sure the strap is
not twisted.
Attach the tether strap hook to the
tether anchor, then tighten the
strap as instructed by the child
seat maker.
4.
5.
6.
7.
92
Installing a Child Seat
46
TETHER STRAP HOOK
Flexible type
ANCHOR
06/08/08 14:23:06 31SDR620_051
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
When not using the LATCH system,
all child seats must be secured to the
vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt.
With the child seat in the desired
seating position, route the belt
through the child seat according
to the seat maker’s instructions,
then insert the latch plate into the
buckle.
To activate the lockable retractor,
slowly pull the shoulder part of the
belt all the way out until it stops,
then let the belt feed back into the
retractor.
After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
thebeltout,itisnotlocked,and
you will need to repeat these steps.
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in
all seating positions except the
driver’s have a lockable retractor
that must be activated to secure a
child seat.
1. 2.
3.
CONTINUED
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/
Shoulder Belt
Installing a Child Seat
Driver and Passenger Safety
47
06/08/08 14:23:17 31SDR620_052
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
After confirming that the belt is
locked, grab the shoulder part of
the belt near the buckle, and pull
up to remove any slack from the
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child seat will not be secure.
To deactivate the lockable retractor
andremoveachildseat,unlatchthe
buckle, unroute the seat belt, and let
the belt fully retract.
Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers. If the child seat is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
To remove slack, it may help to
putweightonthechildseat,or
push on the back of the seat while
pulling up on the belt.
4. 5.
Installing a Child Seat
48
06/08/08 14:23:24 31SDR620_053
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
A child seat with a tether can be
installed in any seating position in
the back seat, using one of the
anchorage points shown above.
Since a tether can provide additional
security to the lap/shoulder belt
installation, we recommend using a
tether whenever one is required or
available.
Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.
After properly securing the child
seat (see page ), route the
tether strap over the seat-back.
Follow steps 2 and 3 from the
previous column.Lift the anchor cover, then attach
the tether strap hook to the
anchor, making sure the strap is
not twisted.
After properly securing the child
seat (see page ), lift the head
restraint, then route the tether
strap through the head restraint
legs.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
47 47
Installing a Child Seat with a
Tether
Using an Outer Anchor Using the Center Anchor
Installing a Child Seat
Driver and Passenger Safety
49
TETHER STRAP HOOK
TETHER ANCHORAGE POINTS
TETHER STRAP HOOK
ANCHOR
ANCHOR
06/08/08 14:23:37 31SDR620_054
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt
properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt, then ask
yourself:
When a child reaches the
recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the
child should sit in a back seat on a
booster seat and wear a lap/shoulder
belt.
Does the child sit all the way back
against the seat?
Do the child’s knees bend
comfortably over the edge of the
seat?
The following pages give
instructions on how to check proper
seat belt fit, what kind of booster
seat to use if one is needed, and
important precautions for a child
who must sit in front.
1.
2.
Checking Seat Belt Fit
Protecting Larger Children
50
Allowing a child age 12 or under
to sit in front can result in injury
or death if the passenger’s front
airbag inflates.
If a child must ride in front,
move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, use a booster
seat if needed, have the child
sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly.
06/08/08 14:23:46 31SDR620_055
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Does the shoulder belt cross
between the child’s neck and arm?
Is the lap part of the belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s
thighs?
Will the child be able to stay
seated like this for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these
questions, the child is ready to wear
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If
you answer no to any question, the
child needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward-
facing child seat should ride in a
back seat and use a booster seat
until the lap/shoulder belt fits them
properly without the booster.
Some states and Canadian provinces
also require children to use a booster
seat until they reach a given age or
weight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Be
sure to check current laws in the
states or provinces where you intend
to drive.
If a child who uses a booster seat
must ride in front, move the vehicle
seat as far back as possible and be
sure the child is wearing the seat
belt properly.
Booster seats can be high-back or
low-back. Whichever style you select,
make sure the booster seat meets
federal safety standards (see page
) and that you follow the booster
seat maker’s instructions.
A child may continue using a booster
seat until the tops of their ears are
even with the top of the vehicle’s or
booster’s seat-back. A child of this
height should be tall enough to use
the lap/shoulder belt without a
booster seat.
4.
5.
3.
43
Using a Booster Seat
Protecting Larger Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
51
06/08/08 14:23:58 31SDR620_056
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
If you decide that a child can safely
ride up front, be sure to:
Carefully read the owner’s manual,
and make sure you understand all
seat belt instructions and all safety
information.
Move the vehicle seat to the rear-
most position.
Have the child sit up straight, back
against the seat, and feet on or
near the floor.
Check that the child’s seat belt is
properly and securely positioned.
Supervise the child. Even mature
children sometimes need to be
reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.
Of course, children vary widely. And
while age may be one indicator of
when a child can safely ride in front,
there are other important factors you
should consider.
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates in a moderate to severe
frontal collision, the airbag can cause
serious injuries to a child who is
unrestrained, improperly restrained,
sitting too close to the airbag, or out
of position.
A side airbag also poses risks. If any
part of a larger child’s body is in the
path of a deploying side airbag, the
child could receive possibly serious
injuries.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
aged 12 and under be properly
restrained in a back seat.
Physically, a child must be large
enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
properly fit (see pages and ). If
the seat belt does not fit properly,
with or without the child sitting on a
booster seat, the child should not sit
in front.
To safely ride in front, a child must
be able to follow the rules, including
sitting properly, and wearing the seat
belt properly throughout a ride.
5016
Physical Size
Maturity
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
Front
Protecting Larger Children
52
06/08/08 14:24:12 31SDR620_057
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
This could result
in serious neck injuries during a
crash.
Devices intended to
improve a child’s comfort or
reposition the shoulder part of a
seat belt can make the belt less
effective and increase the chance
of serious injury in a crash.
This could
cause very serious injuries during
a crash. It also increases the
chance that the child will slide
under the belt in a crash and be
injured.
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Do not let a child wear a seat belt
across the neck.
Do not put any accessories on a
seat belt.
Do not let a child put the shoulder
part of a seat belt behind the back
or under the arm.
Two children should never use the
same seat belt.
Additional Safety Precautions
Protecting Larger Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
53
06/08/08 14:24:19 31SDR620_058
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Your vehicle’s exhaust contains
carbon monoxide gas. Carbon
monoxide should not enter the
vehicle in normal driving if you
maintain your vehicle properly and
follow the information on this page.
High levels of carbon monoxide can
collect rapidly in enclosed areas,
such as a garage. Do not run the
engine with the garage door closed.
Even with the door open, run the
engine only long enough to move the
vehicle out of the garage.
Have the exhaust system inspected
for leaks whenever:
With the trunk open, airflow can pull
exhaust gas into your vehicle’s
interior and create a hazardous
condition. If you must drive with the
trunk open, open all the windows and
set the climate control system as
shown below.
If you must sit in your parked vehicle
with the engine running, even in an
unconfined area, adjust the climate
control system as follows:
Select the fresh air mode.
Select the mode.
Turn the fan on high speed.
Set the temperature control to a
comfortable setting.
The vehicle is raised for an oil
change.
You notice a change in the sound
of the exhaust.
The vehicle was in an accident
that may have damaged the
underside.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
54
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause
unconsciousness and even kill
you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or
activities that expose you to
carbon monoxide.
06/08/08 14:24:29 31SDR620_059
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
These labels are in the locations
shown. They warn you of potential
hazards that could cause serious
injury or death. Read these labels
carefully. If a label comes off or
becomeshardtoread(exceptforthe
U.S. dashboard label which is
removed by the owner), contact your
dealer for a replacement.
Canadian models
U.S. model
U.S. model Canadian model
U.S. model
U.S. model only
Canadian model
Canadian model
U.S. model
Safety Labels
Driver and Passenger Safety
55
SUN VISOR
HOOD
DOORJAMBS
RADIATOR
CAP
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
DASHBOARD
06/08/08 14:25:24 31SDR620_060
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
▲
▼
background
This section gives information about
the controls and displays that
contribute to the daily operation of
your vehicle. All the essential
controls are within easy reach.
...........................Control Locations . 58
............................Instrument Panel . 59
..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 60
.............................................Gauges . 67
....................Information Display . 68
.....................................Odometer . 68
...Outside Temperature Display . 68
...................................Trip Meter . 69
................Average Fuel Mileage . 70
.........IMA Battery Level Gauge . 71
................Charge/Assist Gauge . 72
...................Temperature Gauge . 72
..................................Fuel Gauge . 73
..................Maintenance Minder . 73
..........Check Fuel Cap Message . 73
Controls Near the Steering
...........................................Wheel . 74
......................Wipers and Washers . 75
...........Turn Signal and Headlights . 76
Automatic Lighting Off
.....................................Feature . 77
............Daytime Running Lights . 78
........Instrument Panel Brightness . 78
..............................Hazard Warning . 79
.................Rear Window Defogger . 79
..........Steering Wheel Adjustment . 80
...............................Keys and Locks . 81
........................Immobilizer System . 82
................................Ignition Switch . 83
......................................Door Locks . 84
..............Childproof Door Locks . 85
.......................Remote Transmitter . 85
................................................Trunk . 88
........Emergency Trunk Opener . 89
............................................Armrest . 89
....................................Seat Heaters . 90
.................................................Seats . 90
.............................................Mirrors . 93
....Adjusting the Power Mirrors . 93
................Power Mirror Heaters . 94
..............................Power Windows . 94
.........................................Moonroof . 97
.................................Parking Brake . 98
..........................................Sun Visor . 99
..................................Vanity Mirror . 99
.........Interior Convenience Items . 100
.....................Beverage Holders . 100
........Accessory Power Sockets . 100
.............Console Compartment . 101
....................Center CD Pocket . 101
....................Sunglasses Holder . 102
..................................Glove Box . 102
..................................Coat Hook . 103
...............................Interior Lights . 104
Instruments and Controls
Instruments and Controls
57
06/08/08 14:25:32 31SDR620_062
Main Menu
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
background
Control Locations
58
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS
AUDIO SYSTEM
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
CRUISE CONTROLS
TRUNK RELEASE LEVER
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
MIRROR CONTROLS
INDICATORS
GAUGES
MOONROOF SWITCH
(P.60)
(P.67)
(P.97)
(P.93)
(P.84)
(P.94)
(P.88)
(P.157)
(P.100)
(P.172)
(P.106)
(P.118)
(P.79)
(P.147)
SHIFT LEVER
FUEL FILL DOOR
RELEASE LEVER
HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
PARKING BRAKE (P.98)
(P.158)
06/08/08 14:25:40 31SDR620_063
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
background
The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
Instrument Panel
Instruments and Controls
59
MALFUNCTION
INDICATOR LAMP
SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
INDICATOR
DOOR AND TRUNK
OPEN MONITOR
LIGHTS ON INDICATOR
SIDE AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR
IMA SYSTEM
INDICATOR
CRUISE CONTROL
MAIN INDICATOR
FUEL ECONOMY INDICATOR
SEAT BELT REMINDER
INDICATOR
VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR
HIGH BEAM
INDICATOR
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) INDICATOR
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS
INDICATOR
SECURITY SYSTEM
INDICATOR
CHARGING SYSTEM
INDICATOR
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
INDICATOR
TURN SIGNAL
AND HAZARD
WARNING
INDICATORS
AUTO IDLE STOP
INDICATOR
PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE
SYSTEM INDICATOR
LOW FUEL
INDICATOR
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING INDICATORS
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
(EPS) INDICATOR
MAINTENANCE
MINDER INDICATOR
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA)
SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P.61)
(P.62)
(P.65)
(P.64)
(P.62)
(P.61)
(P.61)
(P.60)
(P.60)
(P.63)
(P.63)
(P.66)
(P.65)
(P.66)
(P.66)
(P.66)
(P.63)
(P.60)
(P.65)
(P.60)
(P.63)
(P.60)
(P.64)
(P.64)
(P.65)
(P.62)
06/08/08 14:25:47 31SDR620_064
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
The instrument panel has many
indicators to give you important
information about your vehicle.
The engine can be severely damaged
if this indicator flashes or stays on
when the engine is running. For
more information, see page .
If this indicator comes on when the
engine is running, the battery is not
being charged. For more information,
see page .
See page .
This indicator has two functions:
This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. It reminds you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
A beeper also sounds if you have not
fastened your seat belt.
If you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position before fastening
your seat belt, the beeper sounds
and the indicator flashes. If you do
notfastenyourseatbeltbeforethe
beeper stops, the indicator stops
flashing but remains on.
Itcomesonwhenyouturnthe
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. It is a reminder to check
the parking brake. A beeper
sounds if you drive with the
parking brake not fully released.
Driving with the parking brake not
fully released can damage the
brakes and tires.
If it remains lit after you fully
release the parking brake while
the engine is running, or if it
comes on while driving, there
could be a problem with the brake
system. For more information, see
page .
1.
2.
245
245
246
247
Instrument Panel Indicators
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
Charging System
Indicator
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
Parking Brake and Brake
System Indicator
Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator
60
U.S. Canada
06/08/08 14:26:02 31SDR620_065
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
If your front passenger does not
fasten their seat belt, the indicator
comes on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
If either of you do not fasten your
seat belt while driving, the beeper
will sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals. For more
information, see page .
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, and when the ignition
switch is turned to the START (III)
position. If it comes on at any other
time, there is a problem with the
ABS. If this happens, have your
vehicle checked at a dealer. With
this on, your vehicle still has normal
braking ability but no anti-lock
brakes. For more information, see
page .
This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. If it comes on at any
other time, it indicates that the
passenger’s side airbag has
automatically shut off. For more
information, see page .
This indicator comes on briefly when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position. If it comes on at
any other time, it indicates a
potential problem with your front
airbags. This indicator will also alert
you to a potential problem with your
side airbags, passenger’s side airbag
automatic cutoff system, side curtain
airbags, automatic seat belt
tensioners, driver’s seat position
sensor, or the front passenger’s
weight sensors. For more
information, see page .
20
31
32
181
Instrument Panel Indicators
Supplemental Restraint
System Indicator
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Indicator
Side Airbag Off
Indicator
Instruments and Controls
61
U.S. Canada
06/08/08 14:26:13 31SDR620_066
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. For more information, see
page .
This indicator has three functions:
Itcomesonasareminderthatyou
have turned off the vehicle
stability assist (VSA) system.
It flashes when VSA is active (see
page ).
It comes on along with the VSA
system indicator if there is a
problem with the VSA system.
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
Ifitcomesonandstaysonatany
other time, or if it does not come on
when you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, there is a
problem with the VSA system. Take
your vehicle to a dealer to have it
checked. Without VSA, your vehicle
still has normal driving ability, but
will not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement. See page
for more information on the
VSA system.
If the trunk or any door is not tightly
closed, the monitor reminds you to
close the open trunk or door(s)
before you start driving.
All the indicators in the monitor
come on for a few seconds when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
1.
2.
3.183
183
183
Door and Trunk Open MonitorVSA Activation IndicatorVehicle Stability Assist
(VSA) System Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
62
06/08/08 14:26:29 31SDR620_067
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
This indicator comes on as a
reminder that you must refuel soon.
The left or right turn signal indicator
blinks when you signal a lane change
or turn. If the indicators do not blink,
or if they blink rapidly, it usually
means one of the turn signal bulbs is
burned out (see page ). Replace
the bulb as soon as possible, since
other drivers cannot see that you are
signaling.
This indicator reminds you that the
exterior lights are on. It comes on
when the light switch is in either the
or position. If you turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or LOCK (0) position without
turning off the light switch, this
indicator will stay on. A reminder
chime will also sound when you open
the driver’s door.
When you press the hazard warning
button, both turn signal indicators
and all turn signals on the outside of
the vehicle flash.
When the indicator comes on, there
are about 2.72 U.S. gal (10.3
)of
fuel remaining in the tank before the
needle reaches E. There is a small
reserve of fuel remaining in the tank
when the needle does reach E.
216
Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
Lights On Indicator Low Fuel Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
Instruments and Controls
63
LOW FUEL INDICATOR
06/08/08 14:26:39 31SDR620_068
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
This indicator comes on when the
security system is set. See page
for more information on the
security system.
This indicator comes on with the
high beam headlights. For more
information, see page .
When the daytime running lights
(DRL) are on, this indicator comes
on with reduced brightness.
If this indicator comes on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position and the parking brake is
released, it means there is a problem
in the high beam headlight’s circuit.
Have your vehicle checked by your
dealer.
146
77
Security System Indicator High Beam IndicatorDaytime Running Lights
Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
64
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
06/08/08 14:26:48 31SDR620_069
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
This indicator comes on when you
turn on the cruise control master
button (see page ).
This indicator comes on when you
set the cruise control. See page
for information on operating the
cruise control.
This indicator comes on for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. It will
gooffifyouhaveinserteda
properly-coded ignition key. If it is
not a properly-coded key, the
indicator will blink and the engine
will not start (see page ).
This indicator also blinks several
times when you turn the ignition
switch from the ON (II) position to
the ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)
position.
This indicator comes on when the
washer fluid level is low. Add washer
fluidwhenyouseethisindicator
come on (see page ).
This indicator comes on for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. It
remindsyouthatitistimetotake
your vehicle in for scheduled
maintenance. The maintenance main
items and sub items will be displayed
in the information display. See page
for more information on the
maintenance minder.
This indicator goes off when your
dealer resets it after completing the
required maintenance service.
147
147 193
82
209
Canadian model only
Cruise Control Indicator
Cruise Control Main
Indicator
Immobilizer System
Indicator
Washer Level Indicator
Maintenance Minder
Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
Instruments and Controls
65
06/08/08 14:27:05 31SDR620_070
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it comes on at any other
time, it indicates a problem in the
integrated motor assist (IMA)
system. With the IMA indicator on,
the vehicle may not accelerate as it
normally does. Have the vehicle
checked by the dealer as soon as
possible.
If the power steering system
overheats while driving, the assist is
reduced and steering may feel
slightly harder.
Driving with the power steering
system continuously overheating can
cause system damage.
This indicator normally comes on
when you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position and goes off
after the engine starts. If it comes on
at any other time, there is a problem
in the electric power steering system.
If this happens, stop the vehicle in a
safe place, and turn off the engine.
Reset the system by restarting the
engine. The indicator will not turn
off immediately. If it does not go off
after driving a short distance, or
comes back on again while driving,
take the vehicle to your dealer to
have it checked. With the indicator
on, the EPS may be off, making the
vehicle harder to steer.
See page .
While the engine is operating in its
most economical range, this
indicator may come on and stay on.
178
Instrument Panel Indicators
Electric Power Steering
(EPS) Indicator
IMA System Indicator
Auto Idle Stop Indicator
Fuel Economy Indicator
66
06/08/08 14:27:18 31SDR620_071
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
CONTINUED
Gauges
Instruments and Controls
67
TEMPERATURE GAUGE
FUEL GAUGE
SPEEDOMETERTACHOMETER
ODOMETER/OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
CHARGE/ASSIST GAUGE
TRIP METER
INFORMATION DISPLAY
SELECT/RESET KNOB
IMA BATTERY LEVEL GAUGE
U.S. model is shown.
06/08/08 14:27:25 31SDR620_072
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
This display shows the outside
temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.
models) or Centigrade (Canadian
models). To see the outside
temperature, press and release the
Select/Reset knob until the
temperature is displayed.
The temperature sensor is in the
front bumper. Therefore, the
temperature reading can be affected
by heat reflection from the road
surface, engine heat, and the
exhaust from surrounding traffic.
This can cause an incorrect
temperature reading when your
speed is under 19 mph (30 km/h).
The sensor delays the display update
until it reaches the correct outside
temperature. This may take several
minutes.
The odometer shows the total
distance your vehicle has been
driven. It measures miles in U.S.
models and kilometers in Canadian
models. It is illegal under U.S.
federal law and Canadian provincial
regulations to disconnect, reset, or
alter the odometer with the intent to
change the number of miles or
kilometers indicated.
The information display provides
various information; odometer,
outside temperature, trip meter, trip
mileage, engine oil life, and
maintenance service items. To
switch the display, press the Select/
Reset knob repeatedly. When you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, what you last selected is
shownintheinformationdisplay.
Outside Temperature DisplayOdometerInformation Display
Gauges
68
06/08/08 14:27:34 31SDR620_073
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
±±
−−−−
− −−−
This meter shows the number of
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
driven since you last reset it.
There are two trip meters: Trip A
and Trip B. Switch between these
displays and the odometer/outside
temperature display by pressing the
Select/Reset knob repeatedly. Each
trip meter works independently, so
you can keep track of two different
distances.
If the outside temperature is
incorrectly displayed, you can adjust
it up to 5°F ( 3°C) warmer or
cooler.
NOTE: The temperature must be
stabilized before doing this
procedure.
Select the outside temperature
display, then press the Select/Reset
knob for 10 seconds. The following
sequences appear, 1 second at a
time:0,1,2,3,4,5, 5, 4, 3, 2,
1, 0, 1 (0, 1, 2, 3, 3, 2, 1, 0, 1).
When the temperature reaches the
desired value, release the Select/
Reset knob. You should see the new
outside temperature displayed.
In certain weather conditions,
temperature readings near freezing
(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is
forming on the road surface.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, what you last
selected is displayed.
To reset a trip meter, display it, and
then press and hold the Select/Reset
knob until the number resets to ‘‘0.0’’.
Trip Meter
Gauges
Instruments and Controls
69
06/08/08 14:27:44 31SDR620_074
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
When either of the trip meters (trip
A or trip B) is displayed, your
vehicle’s average fuel mileage since
you last reset that trip meter can be
shownontheinformationdisplay.
This number is updated once every
10 seconds. To see the average fuel
mileage, press and release the
Select/Reset knob repeatedly.
When you reset a trip meter, the
average fuel mileage for that trip
meter also resets.
It shows the number of mpg (U.S.)
or l/100 km (Canada).
You can temporarily turn off the
average fuel mileage display.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position and make sure the
transmission is in Park and the
parking brake is set.
Use the Select/Reset knob to
select the odometer display.
The display will turn back on when
you repeat the same procedure in
step 3.
To turn it off:
Press and hold the Select/Reset
knob for about 5 to 10 seconds,
then release it. The average fuel
mileage display will turn off.
1.
2.
3.
Average Fuel Mileage
Gauges
Turning Of f the Average Fuel
Mileage Display
70
TRIP METER
AVERAGE FUEL
MILEAGE DISPLAY
06/08/08 14:27:57 31SDR620_075
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
This gauge shows you the state of
charge of the battery for the
integrated motor assist (IMA). This
battery is recharged by the IMA
motor, and discharged by the IMA
when it is assisting the engine with
powering the vehicle.
Since the level is not read directly,
small sensing errors can, over time,
cause the gauge to read higher than
the actual battery level. The system
will then perform a correction, and
the battery level gauge reading will
drop suddenly. When this happens,
IMA assist and Auto Idle Stop are
disabled until the IMA battery is
sufficiently recharged by normal
driving. This should take only a few
minutes.
This correction of the battery level
gauge is normal and does not
indicate a problem. If the IMA
battery develops a problem or
becomes deteriorated, the IMA
system indicator will come on. If this
happens, have the vehicle checked
by your dealer as soon as possible.
The gauge reading may drop near
the bottom under driving conditions
that require assistance for a long
time, such as prolonged acceleration
or climbing a long hill. The IMA
motor will recharge the battery as
you continue driving.
If the battery is mostly discharged,
the Auto Idle Stop function is
disabled (see page ).
The battery level gauge does not
read the battery level directly. It
calculates the level by continuously
measuring the current flow, voltage,
and temperature.
177
IMA Battery Level Gauge
Gauges
Instruments and Controls
71
IMA BATTERY LEVEL GAUGE
06/08/08 14:28:06 31SDR620_076
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
The battery temperature will
normalize after a few minutes of
driving, and the IMA system will
work normally.
This gauge shows you the status of
the integrated motor assist (IMA).
When the IMA battery is being
charged, the left side of the gauge
illuminates. When the IMA is
assisting the engine, the right side of
the gauge illuminates.
This shows the temperature of the
engine’s coolant. During normal
operation, the reading should be in
the middle of the gauge. In severe
driving conditions, such as very hot
weather or a long period of uphill
driving, the reading may reach near
the red mark. If it reaches the red
(Hot) mark, pull safely to the side of
theroad.Seepage for
instructions and precautions on
checking the engine’s cooling
system.
If the IMA battery is too hot or too
cold, the IMA system shuts down to
protect the battery. This disables the
IMA assist and auto idle stop, even
though the battery level gauge may
show that the battery is well-charged.
Therefore, those functions may not
operate when you first start driving
in very hot or very cold weather.
243
Charge/Assist Gauge Temperature Gauge
Gauges
72
CHARGE/ASSIST GAUGE
06/08/08 14:28:16 31SDR620_077
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
This shows how much fuel you have.
It may show slightly more or less
than the actual amount. The needle
returns to the bottom after you turn
off the ignition.
The information display in the
instrument panel shows you the
engine oil life and maintenance
service items when the ignition
switch is in the ON (II) position. This
information helps to keep you aware
of the periodic maintenance your
vehicle needs for continued trouble-
free driving. Refer to page for
more information.
Your vehicle’s onboard diagnostic
system will detect a loose or missing
fuel fill cap as an evaporative system
leak. The first time a leak is detected
a ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message
appears on the information display.
Turn the engine off, and confirm the
fuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosen
it, then retighten it until it clicks at
least once. The message should go
off after several days of normal
driving once you tighten or replace
the fuel fill cap. To scroll to another
display, press the select/reset knob.
The ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message
will appear each time you restart the
engine until the system turns the
message off.
If the system still detects a leak in
your vehicle’s evaporative emissions
system, the malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fill
cap was not already tightened, turn
the engine off, and check or
retighten the fuel fill cap until it
clicks at least once. The MIL should
go off after several days of normal
driving once the cap is tightened or
replaced. If the MIL does not go off,
have your vehicle inspected by a
dealer. For more information, see
page .
167
246
Fuel Gauge Check Fuel Cap Message
Maintenance Minder
Gauges
Instruments and Controls
73
Avoid driving with an extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, damaging
the catalytic converter.
06/08/08 14:28:27 31SDR620_078
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
＊
＊ Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.:
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
74
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BRIGHTNESS
VOICE CONTROL
SWITCHES
HEADLIGHTS/
TURN SIGNALS
REMOTE AUDIO
CONTROLS
HORNSTEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENT
CRUISE CONTROLS
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
HAZARD
WARNING BUTTON
VSA OFF SWITCH
MOONROOF
SWITCH
WINDSHIELD
WIPERS/WASHERS
PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR
(P.78)
(P.76)
(P.143)
(P.97)
(P.184)
(P.80)
(P.75)
(P.33)
(P.79)
(P.147)
(P.79, 109, 112)
06/08/08 14:28:35 31SDR620_079
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
MIST
OFF
INT Intermittent
LO Low speed
HI High speed
Windshield washers
Push the right lever up or down to
select a position.
The wipers run at high
speed until you release the lever.
The wipers are not activated.
The wipers run at low speed.
The wipers run at high speed.
The length of the wiper
interval is varied automatically
according to the vehicle’s speed.
Vary the delay by turning the INT
TIME ring. If you turn it to the
shortest delay, the wiper speed will
increase to low speed operation
when the vehicle speed exceeds 12
mph (20 km/h).
Pull the
wiper control lever toward you, and
hold it. The washers spray until you
release the lever. The wipers run at
low speed, then complete one more
sweep after you release the lever.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Windshield Wiper
MIST
OFF
LO
HI
INT
Windshield Washer
Wipers and Washers
Instruments and Controls
75
06/08/08 14:28:45 31SDR620_080
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
−
−
Push down on the
left lever to signal a left turn and up
to signal a right turn. To signal a lane
change, push lightly on the lever in
the proper direction and hold it. The
lever will return to center when you
release it or complete a turn.
Turn signal
Off
Parking and interior lights
Headlights
High beams
Flashhighbeams
Turning the
switch to the ‘‘ ’’ position turns
on the parking lights, taillights, side-
marker lights, and rear license plate
lights.
Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’
position turns on the headlights.
When the light switch is in the
‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’ position, the
lights on indicator comes on as a
reminder. This indicator stays on if
you leave the light switch on and
turn the ignition switch to the
ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0)
position.
If you leave the lights on with the
key removed from the ignition
switch, you will hear a reminder
chime when you open the driver’s
door.
To flash the high beams, pull the
lever back lightly, then release it.
The high beams will stay on as long
as you hold the lever back.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Turn Signal and Headlights Turn Signal
Headlights On
Turn Signals and Headlights
76
06/08/08 14:28:56 31SDR620_081
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
− If you remove the key from the
ignition switch with the headlight
switch on, but do not open the door,
the lights will turn off after 10
minutes.
The lights will turn on again when
you unlock or open the driver’s door.
If you unlock the door, but do not
open it within 15 seconds, the lights
will go off. With the driver’s door
open, you will hear a lights-on
reminder chime.
To turn on the high
beams, push the lever forward until
you hear a click. The blue high beam
indicator will come on (see page ).
To turn off the high beams, pull the
lever back. To flash the high beams,
pull the lever farther back, and then
release it. The high beams remain on
until the lever is released.
This feature turns off the headlights,
parking lights, side marker lights,
taillights, and rear license plate lights
within 15 seconds of removing the
key from the ignition switch and
closing the driver’s door.
This feature activates if you leave
the headlight switch in the or
position, remove the key, then
open and close the driver’s door.
64
Automatic Lighting Off FeatureHigh Beams
Turn Signals and Headlights
Instruments and Controls
77
06/08/08 14:29:05 31SDR620_082
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
With the headlight switch off, the
high beam headlights and the high
beam indicator come on with
reduced brightness when you turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position and release the parking
brake. They remain on until you turn
the ignition switch off, even if you
set the parking brake.
The headlights revert to normal
operation when you turn them on
with the switch.
The instrument panel will illuminate
with reduced brightness when you
open the driver’s door. The
brightness will increase slightly
when you insert the key in the
ignitionswitch,thengotonormal
brightness when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
The Select/Reset knob on the
instrument panel controls the
brightness of the instrument panel
lights. Turn the knob to adjust the
brightness.
If you do not insert the key in the
ignition switch after opening the
driver’s door, the illumination turns
off about 30 seconds after you close
the door.
To reduce glare at night, the instru-
ment panel illumination dims when
you turn the light switch to or
. Turning the Select/Reset
knob fully to the right until you hear
a click will cancel the reduced bright-
ness.
If you insert the key but do not turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, the illumination turns off in
about 10 seconds.
Instrument Panel BrightnessDaytime Running Lights
Turn Signal and Headlights, Instrument Panel Brightness
78
SELECT/RESET KNOB
06/08/08 14:29:16 31SDR620_083
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Push the button between the center
vents to turn on the hazard warning
lights (four-way flashers). This
causes all four outside turn signals
and both turn indicators in the
instrument panel to flash. Use the
hazard warning lights if you need to
park in a dangerous area near heavy
traffic, or if your vehicle is disabled.
The rear window defogger will clear
fog, frost, and thin ice from the
window. Push the defogger button to
turn it on and off. The indicator in
the button comes on to show the
defogger is on. It shuts off when you
turn off the ignition. You have to
turn the defogger on again when you
restart the vehicle.
Make sure the rear window is clear
and you have good visibility before
starting to drive.
Thedefoggerwiresontheinsideof
the rear window can be accidentally
damaged. When cleaning the glass,
always wipe side to side.
Rear Window DefoggerHazard Warning
Hazard Warning Light, Rear Window Defogger
Instruments and Controls
79
Vehicles without navigation system
Vehicles with navigation system
HAZARD WARNING BUTTON
06/08/08 14:29:27 31SDR620_084
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Make any steering wheel adjustment
before you start driving.
Move the steering wheel up or
down, and in or out to the desired
position. Make sure you can see
the instrument panel gauges and
the indicator lights.
Insert the key in the ignition
switch, and unlock the steering
column.
Push the lever under the steering
column all the way down.
1.
2.
3.
Steering Wheel Adjustment
80
Adjusting the steering wheel
position while driving may
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
inacrash.
Adjust the steering wheel only
when the vehicle is stopped.
06/08/08 14:29:35 31SDR620_085
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Youshouldhavereceivedakey
number tag with your keys. You will
need this key number if you ever
have to get a lost key replaced. Use
only Honda-approved key blanks.
These keys contain electronic
circuits that are activated by the
immobilizer system. They will not
work to start the engine if the
circuits are damaged.
Protect the keys from direct
sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
Donotdropthekeysorsetheavy
objects on them.
Keep the keys away from liquids.
If they get wet, dry them
immediately with a soft cloth.
The master key fits all the locks on
your vehicle. The valet key works
only in the ignition and the door
locks. You can keep the trunk
release handle, rear seat trunk
access, and glove box locked when
you leave your vehicle and the valet
key at a parking facility.
Push the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in that position.
Make sure you have securely
locked the steering wheel in place
by trying to move it up, down, in,
and out.
4.
5.
Keys and Locks
Steering Wheel Adjustment, Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
81
KEY
NUMBER
TAG
VALET KEY
(LIGHT GREY)
MASTER
KEYS WITH
REMOTE
TRANSMITTER
06/08/08 14:29:45 31SDR620_086
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
If the system repeatedly does not
recognize the coding of your key,
contact your dealer.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make
your vehicle undrivable.
If you lose your key and you cannot
start the engine, contact your dealer.
The immobilizer system protects
your vehicle from theft. If an
improperly-coded key (or other
device) is used, the engine will not
start.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the immobilizer
system indicator should come on for
a few seconds, then go off. If the
indicator starts to blink, it means the
system does not recognize the
coding of the key. Turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK (0) position,
remove the key, reinsert it, and turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position again.
The system may not recognize your
key’s coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object (i.e. key
fob) is near the ignition switch when
you insert the key.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Immobilizer System
82
06/08/08 14:29:55 31SDR620_087
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
−
−
−
−
The ignition switch has four
positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY
(I), ON (II), START (III)
Before removing the key from the
ignition switch, make sure the shift
lever is in the Park position.
You can insert or
remove the key only in this position.
To turn the key, the shift lever must
be in Park, and you must push the
key in slightly.
If the front wheels are turned, the
anti-theft lock may make it difficult
to turn the key. Firmly turn the
steering wheel to the left or right as
you turn the key.
You can
operate the audio system and the
accessory power sockets in this
position.
This is the normal key
position when driving. Several of the
lights on the instrument panel come
on as a test when you turn the
ignition switch from the
ACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)
position.
Use this position
only to start the engine. The switch
returns to the ON (II) position when
you let go of the key.
You will hear a reminder beeper if
you leave the key in the ignition
switch in the LOCK (0) or the
ACCESSORY (I) position and open
thedriver’sdoor.Removethekeyto
turn off the beeper.
LOCK (0)
ACCESSORY (I)
ON (II)
START (III)
Ignition Switch
Instruments and Controls
83
06/08/08 14:30:05 31SDR620_088
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Each front door has a power door
lock master switch. Either switch
locks and unlocks all doors. Push the
top of the switch to lock all doors;
push the bottom to unlock them.
Each door has a lock tab on it. Push
down the tab to lock the door and
pull it up to unlock. When you push
down the tab on the driver’s door, all
the doors lock.
To lock any passenger’s door when
getting out of the vehicle, push the
lock tab down, and close the door.
All doors can be locked from the
outsidebyusingthekeyinthe
driver’s door. To unlock only the
driver’s door, insert the key, turn it
clockwise, and release it. The
remaining doors unlock when you
turn the key a second time within a
few seconds.
With the driver’s door open and the
key in the ignition, both door lock
switches are disabled. They are not
disabled if the driver’s door is closed.
Pushing the switch down on the
open passenger’s door will lock all
doors.
Lockout Prevention
Door Locks
84
POWER DOOR LOCK MASTER SWITCH
LOCK TAB
Unlock
Lock
Unlock
Lock
06/08/08 14:30:15 31SDR620_089
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
−
−
The childproof door locks are
designed to prevent children seated
in the rear from accidentally opening
the rear doors. Each rear door has a
lock lever near the edge. When the
lock lever is pushed down, the door
cannot be opened from the inside
regardless of the position of the lock
tab. To open the door, pull the lock
tab up, and use the outside door
handle.
Pressthisbuttononceto
lock all doors. Some exterior lights
will flash once. When you push
LOCK twice within 5 seconds, you
will hear a horn to verify that the
doors are locked. You cannot lock
the doors if any door is not fully
closed or the key is in the ignition
switch.
Pressthisbuttononce
to unlock the driver’s door. Push it
twice to unlock the other doors.
Some exterior lights will flash twice
each time you press the button.
The ceiling light (if the ceiling light
switch is in the center position) will
come on when you press the
UNLOCK button. If you do not open
any door, the light stays on for about
30 seconds, then fades out. If you
relock the doors with the remote
transmitter before 30 seconds have
elapsed, the light will go off
immediately.
CONTINUED
Remote TransmitterChildproof Door Locks
LOCK
UNLOCK
Door Locks, Remote Transmitter
Instruments and Controls
85
LEVER
LOCK
BUTTON
UNLOCK
BUTTON
PANIC
BUTTON
LED
TRUNK
RELEASE
BUTTON
UNLOCK
LOCK
06/08/08 14:30:25 31SDR620_090
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
−
−
Avoid dropping or throwing the
transmitter.
Protect the transmitter from
extreme temperature.
Do not immerse the transmitter in
any liquid.
If you lose a transmitter, the
replacement needs to be
reprogrammed by your dealer.
After the doors automatically relock,
the security system will be active.
Pressthisbuttonfor
about 1 second to attract attention;
thehornwillsoundandtheexterior
lights will flash for about 30 seconds.
To cancel panic mode, press any
other button on the remote
transmitter, or turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
Press this
button for about 1 second to open
the trunk. You cannot open the trunk
if the key is in the ignition switch.
If you unlock the doors with the
remote transmitter, but do not open
any of the doors within 30 seconds,
the doors automatically relock.
If it takes several pushes on the
button to lock or unlock the doors,
replace the battery as soon as
possible.
Battery type: CR1616
To replace the battery:
Remove the screw at the base of
the transmitter with a small
Phillips-head screwdriver.
Separate the transmitter by prying
its middle seam with your
fingernail.
1.
2.
PANIC
TRUNK RELEASE
Replacing the Transmitter
Battery
Remote Transmitter Care
Remote Transmitter
86
SCREW
06/08/08 14:30:41 31SDR620_091
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
＋
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Inside the transmitter, separate
the inner cover from the keypad
by releasing the two tabs on the
cover.
Remove the old battery from the
back of the inner cover, and note
the polarity. Make sure the
polarity of the new battery is the
same ( side facing down), then
insert it into the back of the cover.
An improperly disposed of battery
can hurt the environment.
Always confirm local regulations
for battery disposal.
Install the parts in reverse order.
3.
4.
5.
Remote Transmitter
Instruments and Controls
87
BATTERY
TAB
06/08/08 14:30:50 31SDR620_092
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Pull up on the trunk release lever
located to the left of the driver’s
seat.
You can open the trunk in either of
the following ways:
Press and hold the trunk release
button on the remote transmitter.
To close the trunk, press down on
the trunk lid.
See page for cargo loading and
weight limit information. Keep the
trunk lid closed at all times while
driving to avoid damaging the lid,
and to prevent exhaust gas from
getting into the interior. See
on page .
Lock the trunk release lever with
your master key to prevent someone
from opening the trunk. If they need
to lock/unlock the doors or drive
your vehicle, give them your valet
key.
165
54
Carbon
Monoxide Hazard
Trunk
88
Pull
TRUNK RELEASE LEVER
MASTER KEY
06/08/08 14:30:59 31SDR620_093
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
As a safety feature, your vehicle has
a release lever on the trunk latch so
the trunk can be opened from the
inside.
To open the trunk, push the release
lever to the left.
To use the console lid as an armrest,
slide it to the desired position.
Make sure your passenger’s hands
orfingersareawayfromthearmrest
before moving it.
For more information about child
safety, see page .
Parents should decide if their
children should be shown how to use
this feature.
40
Emergency Trunk Opener Armrest
Trunk, Armrest
Instruments and Controls
89
RELEASE LEVER
06/08/08 14:31:09 31SDR620_094
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
−See pages for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position seats and seat-backs.
13
15
The controls for the adjustable
driver’s power seat are on the
outside edge of the seat bottom. You
can adjust the power seat with the
ignition switch in any position. Make
all seat adjustments before you start
driving.
Moving the long horizontal switch
adjusts the seat bottom in several
directions. The seat bottom adjusts
in the direction you move the switch.
The short vertical switch adjusts the
seat back angle.
Both front seats are equipped with
seat heaters. The driver’s seat has
heaters in both the seat-back and
seat cushion, but because of the
sensors for the side airbag system,
there is no heater in the passenger’s
seat-back. The ignition switch must
be in the ON (II) position to use the
heaters.
If the engine is left idling for an
extended period, do not use the
seat heaters even on the LO
setting. It can weaken the battery,
causing hard starting.
Use the HI setting only to heat the
seats quickly, because it draws
large amounts of current from the
battery.
Follow these precautions whenever
you use the seat heaters:
In the LO setting, the heater runs
continuously. It does not cycle with
temperature changes.
In the HI setting, the heater turns off
when the seat gets warm, and turns
back on after the seat’s temperature
drops.
After the seat reaches a comfortable
temperature, select LO by pushing
the back of the switch. This will keep
the seat warm.
Adjusting the Driver’s SeatSeat Heaters
Seat Heaters, Seats
90
06/08/08 14:31:22 31SDR620_095
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Moves the seat
forward and backward.
Moves the front of the
seat up or down and
the rear of the seat up
or down.
Raises or lowers the
seat.
Adjusts the seat-back
angle forward or
backward.
To change the lumbar support, move
the lever on the right side of the
seat-back forward or backward.
Keep moving the lever forward or
backward until you find a suitable
position.
To adjust the seat forward or
backward, pull up on the bar under
the seat cushion’s front edge. Move
the seat to the desired position, and
releasethebar.Trytomovetheseat
to make sure it is locked in position.
CONTINUED
Adjusting the Passenger’s SeatDriver’s Lumbar Support
Seats
Instruments and Controls
91
06/08/08 14:31:34 31SDR620_096
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
To change the seat-back angle, pull
up on the lever on the outside of the
seat bottom.
They are most effective when you
adjust them so the back of the
occupant’s head rests against the
center of the restraint.
The front and rear head restraints
adjust for height. You need both
hands to adjust the restraint. Do not
attempt to adjust it while driving. To
raise it, pull upward. To lower the
restraint, push the release button
and push the restraint down.
Your vehicle has adjustable head
restraints on the front seats and on
the outside positions of the rear seat.
See page for important safety
information and a warning about how to
properly position the head restraints.
15
Head Restraints
Seats
92
RELEASE BUTTON
06/08/08 14:31:42 31SDR620_097
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
Push or pull the adjustment knob
right, left, up, or down to move the
mirror.
Keeptheinsideandoutsidemirrors
clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
you start driving.
The inside mirror has day and night
positions. The night position reduces
glare from headlights behind you.
Flip the tab on the bottom edge of
the mirror to select the day or night
position.
Turn the adjustment knob to L
(driver’s side) or R (passenger’s
side).
When you finish, turn the
adjustment knob to the center
(off) position. This turns off the
adjustment knob to keep your
setting.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Adjusting the Power Mirrors
Mirrors
Instruments and Controls
93
TAB
ADJUSTMENT KNOB
06/08/08 14:31:53 31SDR620_098
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
− To open the driver’s
window, push the window switch
firmly down, then release it. To stop
the window from going all the way
down, pull back on the window
switch briefly.
To close the driver’s window fully,
pull back the window switch firmly,
then release it. To stop the window
from going all the way up, push
down on the window switch briefly.
The outside mirrors are heated to
remove fog and frost. With the
ignition switch in the ON (II)
position, turn on the heaters by
pressing the button. The indicator in
the button comes on as a reminder.
Press the button again to turn the
heaters off.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position to raise or lower any
window. To open the window, push
the switch down and hold it. Release
the switch when you want to stop the
window. To close the window, pull
back on the switch and hold it.
Power Windows
AUTO
Power Mirror Heaters
Mirrors, Power Windows
94
DRIVER’S WINDOW
SWITCH
MAIN SWITCH
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
Closing a power window on
someone’s hands or fingers can
cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are
away from the windows before
closing them.
06/08/08 14:32:03 31SDR620_099
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
− If the driver’s
window senses any obstacle while it
is closing automatically, it will
reverse direction, and then stop. To
close the window, remove the
obstacle, then use the window switch
again.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the
window is almost closed. You should
always check that all passengers and
objects are away from the window
before closing it.
To open or close the driver’s window
partially, push down or pull back on
the window switch lightly and hold it.
The window will stop when you
release the switch.
When you push the MAIN switch in,
the switch is off, and the passenger
windows cannot be raised or lowered.
To cancel this feature, push on the
switch again to get it to pop out.
Keep the MAIN switch off when you
have children in the vehicle so they
do not injure themselves by
operating the windows
unintentionally.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, or the
driver’s window fuse is removed, the
AUTO function may be disabled. If
the AUTO function is disabled, the
power window system will need to be
reset after reconnecting the battery
or installing the fuse.
Start the engine. Push down and
hold the driver’s window switch
until the window is fully open.
Pull and hold the driver’s window
switch to close the window
completely, then hold the switch
for about 2 seconds.
If the power windows do not operate
properly after resetting, have your
vehicle checked by your dealer.
1.
2.
CONTINUED
AUTO REVERSE
Power Windows
Instruments and Controls
95
06/08/08 14:32:13 31SDR620_100
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
The power window system has a key-
off delay function. The windows will
stilloperateforupto10minutes
after you turn off the ignition switch.
Opening either front door cancels
the delay function. You must turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position again before you can raise
or lower the windows.
You can open and close the windows
with the key in the driver’s door lock.
To open:
Insert the key in the driver’s door
lock.
Turn the key clockwise, then
release it.
You cannot close the windows with
the remote transmitter.
To open the windows further,
press the button again.
Press the UNLOCK button a
second time, and hold it. The
passenger’s doors unlock, and all
four windows start to open. To
stop the windows, release the
button.
Press the UNLOCK button once
to unlock the driver’s door.
You can open all of the windows
from the outside with the remote
transmitter.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
Opening/Closing the Windows with
the Key
Opening the Windows with the
Remote Transmitter
Power Window Control
Operations
Power Windows
96
UNLOCK BUTTON
Open
Close
06/08/08 14:32:27 31SDR620_101
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Turnthekeyclockwiseagain,and
hold it. All four windows start to
open. To stop the windows,
release the key.
To open the windows further, turn
andholdthekeyagain.
To close:
Insert the key in the driver’s door
lock.
Turn the key counterclockwise,
then release it.
Turn the key counterclockwise
again, and hold it. All four
windowsstarttoclose.Tostopthe
windows, release the key.
To close the windows further, turn
andholdthekeyagain.
The moonroof has two positions: it
can be tilted up in the back for
ventilation, or it can be slid back into
the roof. Use the switch under the
left dashboard vent to operate the
moonroof. The ignition switch must
be in the ON (II) position.
To tilt up the back of the moonroof,
press and hold the center button
. To close the moonroof, press
and hold the upper button . To
open the moonroof, press and hold
the lower button . Release the
button when the moonroof gets to
the desired position. Make sure
everyone’s hands are away from the
moonroof before opening or closing
it.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.
4.
CONTINUED
Moonroof
Power Windows, Moonroof
Instruments and Controls
97
MOONROOF SWITCH
06/08/08 14:32:41 31SDR620_102
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
The moonroof has a key-off delay
function. You can still open and close
the moonroof for up to 10 minutes
after you turn off the ignition switch.
The key-off delay function cancels as
soon as you open either front door.
You must then turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position to
operate the moonroof.
To apply the parking brake, pull the
lever up fully. To release it, pull up
slightly, push the button, and lower
the lever. The parking brake
indicator in the instrument panel
should go out when the parking
brake is fully released with the
engine running (see page ).60
Parking Brake
Moonroof, Parking Brake
98
PARKING BRAKE LEVER
BUTTON
Opening or closing the
moonroof on someone’s hands
or fingers can cause serious
injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers
are clear of the moonroof
before opening or closing it.
If you try to open the moonroof in
below-freezing temperatures, or when
it is covered with snow or ice, you can
damage the moonroof panel or motor.
06/08/08 14:32:49 31SDR620_103
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Thevanitymirrorlightscomeon
when you pull up the cover.
Tousethevanitymirrorontheback
of the sun visor, pull up the cover.
If you drive without fully releasing
the parking brake, the beeper
sounds continuously.
To use a sun visor, pull it down. You
can also use a sun visor at the side
window. Remove the support rod
from the clip, and swing the sun
visor toward the side window.
Vanity MirrorSun Visor
Parking Brake, Sun Visor, Vanity Mirror
Instruments and Controls
99
Driving the vehicle with the parking
brake applied can damage the rear
brakes and hubs.
06/08/08 14:33:00 31SDR620_104
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Be careful when you are using the
beverage holders. A spilled liquid
that is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Liquid can also spill
from the door pocket beverage
holders when you close the doors.
Use only resealable containers in the
door pockets.
Spilled liquids can damage the
upholstery, carpeting, and electrical
components in the interior.
These sockets are intended to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or less (10
amps). None of the sockets will
power an automotive type cigarette
lighter element. When more than
one socket is being used, the
combined power rating of the
accessories should be 120 watts or
less (10 amps).
Interior Convenience Items
Beverage Holders
Accessory Power Sockets
100
BEVERAGE HOLDERS
GLOVE BOX
TRUNK SEAT-BACK POCKETS
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT and
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
REAR DOOR POCKET and
BEVERAGE HOLDER
FRONT DOOR POCKET and
BEVERAGE HOLDER
CENTER POCKET, COIN POCKET and
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
06/08/08 14:33:08 31SDR620_105
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
To open the console compartment,
pull up on the right lever and lift the
armrest.
To close, lower the armrest, and
push it down until it latches.
Youcanputsmallitemsinthetray
located in the console compartment
lid. To use the tray, pull up on the
left lever and lift up the armrest.
Thetrayintheconsolecompartment
has a coin holder.
To open the center CD pocket, push-
down on the center of the lid to
unlatch it. It will swing open
automatically.
To close it, push the lid down until it
latches.
This pocket can store up to 12 CDs.
For vehicles without Navigation System
Interior Convenience Items
Console Compartment Center CD Pocket
Instruments and Controls
101
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
RIGHT LEVER
LEFT LEVER
Push
06/08/08 14:33:20 31SDR620_106
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Open the glove box by pulling the
handle to the left. Close it with a firm
push. Lock or unlock the glove box
with the master key.
To open the sunglasses holder, push
on the front edge. Make sure the
holder is closed while you are driving.
The glove box light is on when the
parking lights are on.
Sunglasses Holder Glove Box
Interior Convenience Items
102
GLOVE BOX
An open glove box can cause
serious injury to your passenger
inacrash,evenifthe
passenger is wearing the seat
belt.
Always keep the glove box
closed while driving.
06/08/08 14:33:27 31SDR620_107
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Touseacoathook,slideitout
slightly, then pull it down.
Make sure the coat hook is pulled up
when you are not using it. This hook
is not designed for large or heavy
items.
Interior Convenience Items
Coat Hook
Instruments and Controls
103
06/08/08 14:33:33 31SDR620_108
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
There are two ceiling lights on the
front of the ceiling.
Push the light covers to turn the
lights on and off.
The courtesy light comes on when
youturntheparkinglightson.To
adjust its brightness, turn the Select/
Reset knob on the instrument panel.
The ceiling light has a three-position
switch; ON, Door Activated, and
OFF. In the Door Activated (center)
position, the light comes on when
you:
After all doors are closed tightly, the
light dims slightly, then fades out in
about 30 seconds.
The courtesy lights in the front
doors come on when you open any
door. The light around the ignition
switch only comes on when you open
the driver’s door. After you close the
door, the ignition switch light stays
on for several seconds.
Open any door.
Unlock the doors with the key or
the remote transmitter.
Ceiling Lights Individual Interior Lights
Interior Lights
104
ON
OFF
COURTESY LIGHT
CENTER
06/08/08 14:33:44 31SDR620_109
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Your heating and air conditioning
system provides a comfortable
environment in all weather
conditions.
The standard audio system has
many features. This section
describes those features and how to
use them.
Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio
system that requires a code number
to enable it.
The security system helps prevent
your vehicle from being broken into
or being stolen.
...............Climate Control System . 106
..........Dual Temperature Control . 115
..............Climate Control Sensors . 117
..........Playing the AM/FM Radio . 118
...............Voice Control System . 119
.....................To Play the Radio . 119
....................To Select a Station . 119
.................Adjusting the Sound . 122
....................Radio Frequencies . 123
........................Radio Reception . 123
..................................Playing a CD . 125
..........Playing a CD, CD Changer . 126
.............................To Play a CD . 126
...............To Stop Playing a CD . 130
Removing CDs from the
.................................Changer . 130
.........CD Player Error Messages . 131
....................Protecting Your CDs . 132
.................General Information . 132
..........................Protecting CDs . 132
...............................Playing a Tape . 133
..........................To Play a Tape . 134
............To Stop Playing a Tape . 134
............Tape Search Functions . 135
Caring for the Tape and
.....................................Player . 136
Playing the XM
Satellite
......................................Radio . 137
...............Satellite Digital Radio . 137
....To Play XM
Satellite Radio . 138
..................To Select a Channel . 138
..............Satellite Radio Signals . 140
Receiving Satellite Radio
....................................Service . 141
................Remote Audio Controls . 143
.................Radio Theft Protection . 144
..........................Setting the Clock . 145
............................Security System . 146
...............................Cruise Control . 147
HomeLink Universal
................................Transceiver . 150
Features
Features
105
06/08/08 14:33:51 31SDR620_110
Main Menu
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
background
Climate Control System
106
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER BUTTON
FAN CONTROL
BUTTONS
AUTO BUTTON
OFF BUTTON
DUAL BUTTON
A/C BUTTON
TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL
(DRIVER’S SIDE)
FAN SPEED
INDICATOR
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL
(PASSENGER’S SIDE)
MODE BUTTON
WINDSHIELD DEFROST BUTTON
RECIRCULATION BUTTON
(U.S. model shown)
Without navigation system
06/08/08 14:33:58 31SDR620_111
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
background
Climate Control System
Features
107
AUTO BUTTON
MODE ICONS
A/C BUTTON
AIR CONDITIONING ICONS
FAN CONTROL ICONS
DUAL BUTTON
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
BUTTONS (PASSENGER’S SIDE)
RECIRCULATION BUTTON
WINDSHIELD DEFROST BUTTON
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTON
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
BUTTONS (DRIVER’S SIDE)
OFF BUTTON
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
(U.S. model shown)
With navigation system
06/08/08 14:34:04 31SDR620_112
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
▲▼
The climate control system for your
vehicle can also be operated using
the voice control system. See the
NavigationsectioninyourQuick
Start Guide for an overview of this
system and the Navigation System
manual for complete details.
Turn the temperature control dial on
the driver’s side to adjust the airflow
temperature on both the driver’s and
passenger’s sides at the same time.
When you press the DUAL button,
the indicator comes on. When it is on,
the airflow temperatures on the
driver’s and passenger’s sides can be
adjusted individually.
Press the temperature control
buttons and on the driver’s side
to adjust the airflow temperature on
both the driver’s and passenger’s
sides at the same time.
When you press the DUAL button,
the indicator comes on. When it is on,
the airflow temperatures on the
driver’s and passenger’s sides can be
adjusted individually.
You can manually select the fan
speed by pressing the fan control
buttons. The fan speed is
represented by vertical bars in the
display.
You can manually select the fan
speed by pressing the A/C button
next to the display, and then
pressing the fan control icons.
On vehicles without navigation system
On vehicles with navigation system
On vehicles without navigation system
On vehicles with navigation system
Only on models equipped with
navigation system
Voice Control System Temperature ControlFan Control
Climate Control System
108
06/08/08 14:34:17 31SDR620_113
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
When the recirculation indicator is
on, air from the vehicle’s interior is
sent throughout the system again.
When the indicator is off, air is
brought in from the outside of the
vehicle (fresh air mode).
Thesystemshouldbeleftinfresh
air mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in recirculation
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.
Switch to recirculation mode when
driving through dusty or smoky
conditions, then return to fresh air
mode.
Press the A/C button to turn the air
conditioning on and off. The display
shows ‘‘A/C ON’’ when the air
conditioning is on. The display
shows ‘‘A/C OFF’’ when the air
conditioning is off.
The display shows ‘‘ON’’ and ‘‘OFF’’
after you press the A/C button. The
display shows ‘‘A/C ON’’ after you
touch ‘‘ON’’ to turn the air
conditioning on. The display shows
‘‘A/C OFF’’ after you touch ‘‘OFF’’ to
turn the air conditioning off.
When the A/C is off, the airflow
temperature does not fall below the
outside air temperature. When you
set the airflow temperature lower
than the outside air temperature,
make sure the A/C is on.
This button turns the rear window
defogger on and off (see page ).
The outside air intakes for the
climate control system are at the
base of the windshield. Keep this
area clear of leaves and other debris.
79
On vehicles without navigation system
On vehicles with navigation system
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
Rear Window Defogger Button
Recirculation Button
Climate Control System
Features
109
06/08/08 14:34:30 31SDR620_114
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Use the mode control buttons or
icons to select the vents the air flows
from. Some air flows from the
dashboard corner vents in all modes.
Air flows from the center
and corner vents in the dashboard.
Air flows from the floor
vents.
Airflow is divided between
the vents in the dashboard and the
floor vents.
The flow-through ventilation system
draws in outside air, circulates it
through the interior, then exhausts it
through vents near the rear window.
Set the temperature to the lower
limit.
Make sure the A/C is off.
Select and fresh air mode.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
Airflow is divided between
the floor vents and the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
Air flows from the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
When you select , the system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C.
Each time you press the MODE
button, the display shows the mode
selected.
Press the A/C button to view the
display, then touch any of the mode
icons on the display.
In AUTO mode, the system controls
the airflow direction automatically
between the dashboard vents and
the floor vents.
1.
2.
3.
4.
On vehicles without navigation system
On vehicles with navigation system
Mode Control Ventilation
Climate Control System
110
06/08/08 14:34:47 31SDR620_115
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
▲▼
The heater uses engine coolant to
warm the air. If the engine is cold, it
will be several minutes before you
feel warm air coming from the
system.
Air conditioning places an extra load
on the engine. Watch the engine
coolant temperature gauge (see page
). If it moves near the red zone,
turn off the A/C until the gauge
reading returns to normal.
Press the A/C button; the manual
operation A/C screen will appear.
Select the ON icon on the display.
Select the desired temperature
and MODE selections. If the
outside air is humid, select the
Recirculation mode. If the outside
air is dry, select Fresh Air mode.
you can
cool it down more rapidly by partially
opening the windows, turning on the
A/C, and setting the fan to
maximum speed in fresh air mode.
Turn on the A/C by pressing the
A/C button.
Make sure the temperature
control dial or button is set to
maximum cool.
Select .
If the outside air is humid, select
Recirculation mode. If the outside
air is dry, select Fresh Air mode.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
Select .
Set the fan to the desired speed.
Adjust the warmth of the air with
the temperature control dial.
Press the A/C button; the manual
operation A/C screen will appear.
Select the desired mode and fan
speed icons on the display.
Adjustforwarmthwiththe
temperature buttons ( or ).
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
72
If the interior is very warm,
On vehicles without navigation system
On vehicles with navigation system
On vehicles without navigation system
On vehicles with navigation system
Using the Heater Using the A/C
Climate Control System
Features
111
06/08/08 14:35:01 31SDR620_116
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Air conditioning, as it cools, removes
moisture from the air. When used in
combination with the heater, it
makes the interior warm and dry.
Turn the fan on.
Turn on the air conditioning.
Select and Fresh Air mode.
Adjust the temperature control
dial or buttons to your preference.
This setting is suitable for all driving
conditions whenever the outside
temperature is above 32°F (0°C).
To remove fog from the inside of the
windows:
Set the fan to the desired speed, or
high for faster defrosting.
Select . The system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C. The
A/C indicator will not come on if it
was previously off.
Adjust the temperature so the
airflow feels warm.
Select to help clear the
rear window.
To increase airflow to the
windshield, close the corner vents.
Select . The system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C. The
A/C indicator will not come on if it
was previously off.
Select .
Set the fan and temperature
controls to maximum level.
To clear the windows faster, you can
close the dashboard corner vents by
rotating the wheel below it. This will
send more warm air to the
windshield defroster vents. Once the
windshield is clear, select the fresh
air mode to avoid fogging the
windows.
For your safety, make sure you have
a clear view through all the windows
before driving.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
3.
To Defog and DefrostTo Dehumidify the Interior To Remove Exterior Frost or Ice
From the Windows
Climate Control System
112
06/08/08 14:35:13 31SDR620_117
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
▲▼
−
The automatic climate control
system adjusts the fan speed and
airflow levels to maintain the interior
temperature you select.
Press the AUTO button.
Set the desired temperature by
turning the temperature control
dial. You will see AUTO in the
system’s display.
Set the desired temperature by
pressing the driver’s side
temperature control buttons. Press
to raise the temperature or
to lower it. The selected
temperature will show in the upper
display.
The system automatically selects the
proper mix of conditioned and/or
heated air that will, as quickly as
possible, raise or lower the interior
temperature to your preference.
If you set the temperature to its
lowest limit (Lo), or its highest limit
(Hi), the system runs at full cooling
or heating only. It does not regulate
the interior temperature.
In cold weather, the fan will not
come on automatically until the
heater starts to develop warm air.
When
the indicator in the Dual button is on,
the driver’s side and passenger’s side
temperature can be controlled
independently (see page ).
115
Dual Temperature Control
On vehicles without navigation system
On vehicles with navigation system
Automatic Climate Control
Climate Control System
Features
113
06/08/08 14:35:24 31SDR620_118
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
−
−
You can manually select various
functions of the automatic climate
controlsystemwhenitisinAUTO.
All other features remain
automatically controlled.
Making any manual selection causes
thewordAUTOinthedisplaytogo
out.
If you press the A/C button next to
the display, the manual selections
will show in the display. Making any
manual selection causes the
indicator in the AUTO button to turn
off.
Press the OFF button. However, a
lack of airflow can cause the
windowstofogup.Youshouldkeep
the fan on at all times so stale air and
moisture do not build up in the
interior and cause fogging.
IfyoupressOFF,theclimatecontrol
system shuts off.
Keep the system off for short
periods only.
To keep stale air and mustiness
from collecting, you should have
the fan running at all times.
When the climate control system is
turned off, the temperature in the
upper display will also turn off.
On vehicles without navigation system
On vehicles with navigation system
On vehicles with navigation system
Semi-automatic Operation To Turn Everything Off
Climate Control System
114
06/08/08 14:35:35 31SDR620_119
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
CONTINUED
Your vehicle has two temperature
control dials, one for the driver, and
one for the front passenger.
Your vehicle has four temperature
control buttons, two for the driver,
and two for the passenger.
Thedriver’ssideandthepassenger’s
side can be controlled independently
by adjusting these dials or buttons
when the indicator in the DUAL
button is on.
Push AUTO or to turn on the
system. The selected temperatures
appear in the display (in the upper
display with the navigation system).
When the indicator in the DUAL
button is off, you can adjust both
sides to the same temperature by
adjusting the driver’s side
temperature control dial or buttons.
On vehicles without navigation system
On vehicles with navigation system
Dual Temperature Control
Temperature Control Dials/Buttons
Features
115
DUAL BUTTON
DUAL BUTTON
DRIVER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL BUTTONS
PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL BUTTONS
DRIVER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
Without navigation system
With navigation system
06/08/08 14:35:45 31SDR620_120
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
▲▼
▲▼
To set the driver’s side temperature
to a different value than the
passenger’s, press the DUAL button,
then turn the driver’s control dial or
press the or buttons on the
driver’s side. To set the passenger’s
side to a different value than the
driver’s, turn the passenger’s control
dial or press the or buttons on
the passenger’s side. You can adjust
the passenger’s side without
pressing the DUAL button first.
When you set the temperature to its
lower or upper limit, it is displayed as
or .
Dual Temperature Control
116
DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE
06/08/08 14:35:51 31SDR620_121
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Theclimatecontrolsystemhastwo
sensors. A sunlight sensor is in the
top of the dashboard, and a
temperature sensor is next to the
steering column. Do not cover the
sensors or spill any liquid on them.
Sunlight Sensor/Temperature
Sensor
Climate Control Sensors
Features
117
SUNLIGHT SENSOR
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
06/08/08 14:35:56 31SDR620_122
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Playing the AM/FM Radio
118
STEREO INDICATOR
SEEK BAR
PRESET BARS
PWR/VOL KNOB
SEEK BAR
SCAN
BUTTON
PWR/VOL
KNOB
UPPER
DISPLAY
PRESET
ICONS
TUNE/
SOUND
KNOB
SCAN BUTTON
TUNE
BAR
A.SEL
BUTTON
SOUND BUTTON
AM/FM
BUTTON
AM/FM
BUTTON
SOUND ICONSCAN
ICON
(U.S. model shown)
(U.S. model shown)
A.SEL ICON
AUDIO
BUTTON
Without navigation system With navigation system
06/08/08 14:36:04 31SDR620_123
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
−
−
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTO
SELECT, and the preset bars or
icons.
Use the TUNE bar or
knob to tune the radio to a desired
frequency. Press the side of the
bar or turn the knob to the right to
tune to a higher frequency, and the
side or turn the knob to the left
to tune to a lower frequency.
The seek function
searches up and down from the
current frequency to find a station
with a strong signal. To activate it,
press the or side of the
bar, then release it.XM satellite radio information is
available on page .
The audio system for your vehicle
can also be operated using the voice
control system. See Navigation
section in your Quick Start Guide for
an overview of this system and the
Navigation System manual for
complete details.
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Turn the system on by pushing the
PWR/VOL knob or the AM/FM
button. Adjust the volume by turning
the PWR/VOL knob.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to is displayed.
To change bands, press the AM/FM
button. On the FM band, ST will be
displayed if the station is broadcast-
ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction in
AM is not available.
Pushing the AUDIO button will also
turn on the system.
137
On vehicles with navigation system
Only on models equipped with
navigation system
CONTINUED
To Select a Station
TUNE
SEEK
To Play the RadioVoice Control System
Playing the AM/FM Radio
Features
119
06/08/08 14:36:16 31SDR620_124
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
−−−− Pick the preset number (1 6)
you want for that station. Press
the left or right side of the bar or
iconandholdituntilyouheara
beep.
Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
Each side of the bars (1
6) or preset icon can store one
frequency on AM, and two
frequencies on FM.
Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two frequencies with each preset
baroricon.
The scan function samples
all stations with strong signals on the
selected band. To activate it, press
the SCAN button, then release it.
You will see SCAN in the display.
The system will scan for a station
with a strong signal. When it finds
one, it will stop and play that station
for about 5 seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will
scan for the next strong station and
play it for 5 seconds. When it plays a
station you want to listen to, press
the SCAN button again.
Push the AUDIO button to view
the audio display. You will see the
six preset icons.
Usethetune,seek,orscan
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
1.
2.
3.
4.
On vehicles with navigation system
PresetSCAN
Playing the AM/FM Radio
120
06/08/08 14:36:26 31SDR620_125
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
−
−
If you do not like the stations Auto
Select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset bars
or icons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, or
SCAN function to find stations, then
store them in the preset bars or
icons as described previously.
If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive your preset stations,
you can use the auto select feature to
find stations in the local area.
Press the A. SEL button or touch the
A. SEL icon. A. SEL will flash in the
display, and the system will go into
scan mode for several seconds. It
stores the frequencies of six AM,
and twelve FM stations in the preset
bars (1 6) or icons. You will see a
‘‘0’’ displayed after pressing a preset
bar or icon if Auto Select cannot find
a strong station for every preset bar
or icon.
press the
A. SEL button or A. SEL icon. This
restores the presets you originally
set.
The preset frequencies may be lost if
your vehicle’s battery goes dead, is
disconnected, or the radio fuse is
removed.
To turn off Auto Select,
Playing the AM/FM Radio
AUTO SELECT
Features
121
06/08/08 14:36:32 31SDR620_126
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
−
−
＋−
Press the SOUND button or icon, or
press the TUNE knob repeatedly to
display the BASS, TREBLE,
BALANCE, and FADER settings.
These two
modes adjust the strength of the
sound coming from each speaker.
BALANCE adjusts the side-to-side
strength, while FADER adjusts the
front-to-back strength.
Use the TREBLE/
BASS modes to adjust the tone to
your liking.
Eachmodeisshowninthedisplayas
it changes. Turn the PWR/VOL
knob to adjust the setting to your
liking. When the level reaches the
center, you will see a ‘‘ ’’ in the
display.
To adjust treble and bass, touch the
‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’ icon on each side of the
TREBLE or BASS adjustment bar.
The adjustment bars show you the
current settings.
To adjust balance, touch the ‘‘L’’ or
‘‘R’’ icon. To adjust fader, touch the
‘‘RR’’ or ‘‘FR’’ icon. The adjustment
bars show you the current settings.
You can also make an adjustment
with the joystick. Move it up and
down to switch the mode, and move
it right and left to change the setting.
The system will automatically return
the display to the selected audio
mode about five seconds after you
stop adjusting a mode.
You can adjust the sound on the
navigation screen. To adjust the
sound, push the AUDIO button, then
enter the sound grid by touching the
SOUNDicononthedisplay.
On vehicles with navigation system
On vehicles without navigation system
On vehicles with navigation system
Adjusting the Sound
Balance/Fader
Treble/Bass
Playing the AM/FM Radio
122
06/08/08 14:36:44 31SDR620_127
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
The radio can receive the complete
AM and FM bands.
Those bands cover these frequen-
cies:
AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHz
FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz
How well the radio receives stations
is dependent on many factors, such
as the distance from the station’s
transmitter, nearby large objects,
and atmospheric conditions.
Driving very near the transmitter of
a station that is broadcasting on a
frequency close to the frequency of
the station you are listening to can
also affect your radio’s reception.
You may temporarily hear both
stations,orhearonlythestationyou
are close to.
A radio station’s signal gets weaker
as you get farther away from its
transmitter. If you are listening to an
AM station, you will notice the sound
volume becoming weaker, and the
stationdriftinginandout.Ifyouare
listening to an FM station, you will
see the stereo indicator flickering off
and on as the signal weakens.
Eventually, the stereo indicator will
go off and the sound will fade
completely as you get out of range of
the station’s signal.
Radio stations on the AM band are
assigned frequencies at least 10 kHz
apart (530, 540, 550). Stations on the
FM band are assigned frequencies at
least 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).
Stations must use these exact
frequencies. It is fairly common for
stations to round off the frequency in
their advertising, so your radio could
display a frequency of 100.9 even
though the announcer may identify
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’
CONTINUED
Radio Frequencies Radio Reception
Playing the AM/FM Radio
Features
123
06/08/08 14:36:54 31SDR620_128
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Radio signals, especially on the FM
band, are deflected by large objects
such as buildings and hills. Your
radio then receives both the direct
signal from the station’s transmitter,
and the deflected signal. This causes
the sound to distort or flutter. This is
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving.
Radio reception can be affected by
atmospheric conditions such as
thunderstorms, high humidity, and
even sunspots. You may be able to
receive a distant radio station one
day and not receive it the next day
because of a change in conditions.
Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Playing the AM/FM Radio
124
06/08/08 14:37:02 31SDR620_129
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Playing a CD
Features
125
SEEK/SKIP
BAR
CD LOAD
INDICATOR
SEEK BAR
PWR/VOL
KNOB
LOAD
BUTTON
CD LOAD INDICATOR
LOAD BUTTON
RPT BUTTON
RDM
BUTTON
EJECT
BUTTON
CD SLOT
PWR/VOL KNOB
UPPER DISPLAY
(U.S. model shown)
(U.S. model shown)
SCAN BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
EJECT
BUTTON
DISC REPEAT
ICON
CD/AUX XM
BUTTON
CD/AUX XM
BUTTON
CD SLOT
AUDIO
BUTTON
CHANGE
DISC
BUTTON
TRACK
RANDOM
ICON
TRACK
REPEAT
ICON
Without navigation system With navigation system
06/08/08 14:37:11 31SDR620_130
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
To load or play CDs, the ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or the ON(II) position.
To listen to satellite radio when a CD
is playing, press the CD/AUX XM
button.
You operate the CD changer with
the same controls used for the radio.
To select the CD changer, press the
CD button. The numbers of the disc
andtruckplayingareshowninthe
display. On vehicles with navigation
system, these numbers also appear
in the upper display. The system will
continuously play a disc until you
change modes.
To play the radio when a CD is
playing, press the AM/FM button.
Press the CD button again to switch
back to the CD player.
To play a tape when a CD is playing,
insert a tape in the player (optional).
If a tape is in the player, press the
CD/AUX button. Press the CD/AUX
button again to switch back to the
CD player.
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
knob or by turning off the ignition,
the disc will stay in the drive. When
youturnthesystembackon,theCD
will begin playing where it left off.
For vehicles with Satellite Radio
To Play a CD
Playing a CD, CD Changer
126
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
06/08/08 14:37:21 31SDR620_131
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
−−
＋
▲
▼
You can also load a CD into an empty
position while a CD is playing. Select
the empty position (the disc number
indicator is not highlighted) and
press the appropriate preset bar or
touch a disc icon. The current CD
stops playing and starts the loading
sequence. The CD just loaded will
play.
To select a different disc, press the
appropriate side of a preset bar
(1 6) or use the Preset 5 (DISC )
to select the previous disc or Preset
6 (DISC ) to select the next disc in
sequence. On vehicles with
navigation system, touch the
appropriate disc icon or press the
or side of the CH/DISC bar. If
youselectanemptypositioninthe
CD changer, the system will try to
load the CD in the next available slot.
Repeat steps 1 through 3 until all
six positions are loaded. If you are
not loading all six positions, the
system begins playing the last CD
loaded.
When the CD load indicator turns
green and ‘‘LOAD’’ appears in the
screen again, insert the next CD in
the slot.
Insert the disc into the CD slot
when the green CD load indicator
comes on. Insert it only about
halfway; the drive will pull it in the
rest of the way. You will see
‘‘BUSY’’ on the display as the CD
load indicator turns red and blinks
as the CD is loaded.
The disc number for an empty
position is highlighted and the red
light starts blinking.
Press and hold the LOAD button
until you hear a beep and see
‘‘LOAD’’ in the display, then
release the button.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CONTINUED
Playing a CD, CD Changer
Loading CDs in the In-dash CD
Changer
Features
127
06/08/08 14:37:31 31SDR620_132
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Push the to
play the next track on the disc. Push
the oncetoreplaythetrackin
play; press it twice to replay the
previous track. To move rapidly
within a track, press and hold the
or button.
Press the RPT button
to continuously replay a track. You
will see RPT in the display. Press the
RPT button again to turn it off.
To continuously
replay the current CD, press and
hold the RPT button for about a
second. You will see D-RPT in the
display. The system switches to the
normal repeat mode when you press
the RPT button during the disc
repeat mode.
Press the RDM
button to play the tracks in random
order. You will see RDM in the
display. Press the RDM button again
to return to normal play.
The SCAN function
samples all the tracks on the
selected disc in the order they are
recorded. To activate it, press and
release the SCAN button. You will
see SCAN in the display, and you will
get a 10 second sampling of each
track on the selected CD. Press the
SCAN button again to get out of scan
mode.
When you press and
hold the SCAN button for more than
2 seconds, the system gives you a 10
second sampling of the first track on
each disc in the in-dash CD changer.
You will see D-SCAN in the display.
Touch the SCAN button again to get
out of disc scan mode.
When you
touch the TRACK REPEAT icon on
the audio display, the system
continuously plays the same track.
You will see REPEAT beside the
track information on the audio
screen, and RPT in the upper display.
Press the icon again to get out of
track repeat mode.
When you touch
the DISC REPEAT icon on the audio
display, the system continuously
replays the current CD. You will see
REPEAT beside the disc information
on the audio screen, and D-RPT in
the upper display. Touch the icon
again to get out of disc repeat mode.
To use the controls, press the
AUDIO button; the control icons will
appear on the screen.
On vehicles without navigation system On vehicles with navigation system
Playing a CD, CD Changer
SEEK/SKIP
REPEAT
DISC REPEAT
RANDOM
SCAN
DISC SCAN
TRACK REPEAT
DISC REPEAT
128
06/08/08 14:37:44 31SDR620_133
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
−− −When you touch
this icon on the audio display or
press the SCAN button, you will get
a10secondsamplingofeachtrack
on the current CD. You will see
SCAN beside the track information
on the audio screen, and SCAN in
the upper display. Press the icon or
button again to get out of track scan
mode.
When you touch the
DISC SCAN icon on the audio
display, or press and hold the SCAN
button for more than 2 seconds, the
system gives you a 10 second
sampling of the first track on each
disc in the in-dash CD changer. You
will see SCAN beside the disc
information on the audio screen, and
D-SCAN in the upper display. The
system switches to the track scan
mode when you press the SCAN
button. To get out of disc scan mode,
touch the icon again, or press and
hold the SCAN button for more than
2 seconds.
When you
touch the TRACK RANDOM icon on
the audio display, the system plays
the tracks on the current CD in
random order. You will see
RANDOM beside the track
information on the audio screen.
Press the icon again to get out of
track random mode.
Playing a CD, CD Changer
TRACK SCAN DISC SCAN TRACK RANDOM
Features
129
06/08/08 14:37:49 31SDR620_134
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
To remove a different disc from the
changer,firstselectitwiththe
appropriate preset bar or icon. When
that CD begins playing, press the
eject button. Continue pressing the
EJECT button to remove all the discs
from the changer.
To remove all the discs in the
changer in a sequence, press and
hold the eject button for about 2
seconds.
To play a tape when a CD is playing,
insert a tape in the player (optional).
If a tape is in the player, press the
CD/AUX button. Press the CD/AUX
button again to switch back to the
CD player.
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, the CD will stay in the
drive. When you turn the system
back on, the CD will begin playing
where it left off.
Press the eject button ( ) to
remove the CD. If you eject the CD,
but do not remove it from the slot,
the system will automatically reload
the CD after 15 seconds and put it in
pause mode. To begin playing, press
the CD button.
PresstheAM/FMorCD/AUX/XM
button to switch to the AM/FM
radio or satellite radio while a CD is
playing. To play the CD, press the
CD/AUX/XM button again.
To remove the disc that is currently
playing, press the eject button. You
will see ‘‘EJECT’’ in the display.
When you press the eject button, the
system switches to the previous
mode (AM/FM radio, satellite radio
(U.S. models), or tape player
(optional)).
Playing a CD, CD Changer
Removing CDs from the ChangerTo Stop Playing a CD
130
06/08/08 14:37:58 31SDR620_135
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Error Message Cause Solution
Thechartontherightexplainsthe
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
If there is still a problem, the error
message will appear again. Press the
eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
FOCUS Error
Mechanical Error
High Temperature
Press the eject button and pull out the disc.
Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CD
player.
Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
Press the eject button and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for damage or deformation.
If the CD cannot be pulled out or the error
indication does not disappear after the disc is
ejected, see your dealer.
Do not try to force the disc out of the player.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
or
or
CD Player Error Messages
Features
131
06/08/08 14:38:09 31SDR620_136
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
When a CD is not being played, store
it in its case to protect it from dust
and other contamination. To prevent
warpage, keep CDs out of direct
sunlight and extreme heat.
To clean a CD, use a clean soft cloth.
Wipe across the CD from the center
to the outside edge.
AnewCDmayberoughonthe
inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness
can flake off and fall on the re-
cording surface of the CD, causing
skipping or other problems. Remove
these pieces by rubbing the inner
and outer edges with the side of a
pencil or pen.
Never try to insert foreign objects in
the CD player or the magazine.
Play only standard round CDs.
Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the
driveorcauseotherproblems.
Handle your CDs properly to
prevent damage and skipping. See
this page.
When using CD-R or CD-RW discs,
use only high quality discs labeled
for audio use.
When recording a CD-R or
CD-RW, the recording must be
closedforittobeusedbythe
system.
CD-R and CD-RW discs will not
work in this unit.
Handle a CD by its edges; never
touch either surface. Do not place
stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.
These, along with contamination
from fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip
pens, can cause the CD to not play
properly or possibly jam in the drive.
On vehicles without navigation system
On vehicles with navigation system
General Information Protecting CDs
Protecting Your CDs
132
06/08/08 14:38:21 31SDR620_137
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Playing a Tape (U.S. Vehicles)
Features
133
PWR/VOL KNOB
AUDIO
DISPLAY
BUTTON
SEEK BARSEEK BAR
RPT INDICATOR TAPE DIRECTION
INDICATOR
PWR/VOL
KNOB
RPT INDICATOR TAPE DIRECTION INDICATOR
CH/DISC
BAR
PRESET BARS
(U.S. model shown) (U.S. model shown)
TAPE
DIRECTION
ICONS
NR ICON
CD/AUX XM
BUTTON
CD/AUX XM
BUTTON
RPT
BUTTON
UPPER
DISPLAY
REPEAT ICON
Without navigation system With navigation system
06/08/08 14:38:30 31SDR620_138
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
＊
＊
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Make sure the open side of the tape
is facing right, then insert the tape
most of the way into the slot. The
system will pull the tape in the rest
of the way, and begin to play it.
Dolby noise reduction turns on
when you insert a tape. The
indicator will light in the
display. If the tape was not recorded
in Dolby, turn it off by pressing the
Preset 4 (NR) side of the preset bar
or touching the NR icon. Dolby
remains off until you press the
preset bar or the icon again.
The tape direction indicator will
show you which side of the tape is
playing. If you want to play the other
side, press the Preset 3 (PLAY/
PROG) side of the preset bar, or
press the AUDIO DISPLAY button
and then touch the appropriate tape
direction icon. When the player
reaches the end of the tape, it will
automatically reverse direction and
play the other side.
To remove the tape, press the eject
button. If you want to turn the player
off, press the PWR/VOL knob or
turn off the ignition. The tape will
remain in the drive. When you turn
the system back on, the tape will
begin playing where it left off.
To switch to the AM/FM radio,
Satellite Radio, or CD changer while
a tape is playing, press the AM/FM
or CD/AUX XM button. To change
back to the tape player, push the
CD/AUX XM button.
Dolby noise reduction is manufactured under
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Optional on all U.S. models
To Play a Tape To Stop Playing a Tape
Playing a Tape (U.S. Vehicles)
134
06/08/08 14:38:38 31SDR620_139
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
−
−
−
▲
▼
−
Press the side to find
the beginning of the current song or
passage. Press the side to find
the beginning of the next song or
passage. When the system reaches
the beginning of a song or passage, it
begins to play it.
If you see the error message
‘‘ ’’ on the display, press the
tape eject button to remove the tape
from the unit. Make sure the tape is
not damaged. If the tape will not
eject or the error message stays on
after the tape ejects, take your
vehicle to your dealer.
To rewind the tape,
push the preset 1 (REW) side of the
preset bar. You will see REW in the
display. To fast forward the tape,
push the preset 2 (FF) side of the
preset bar. You will see FF displayed.
Press the preset 1, 2, or 3 side of the
bars to take the system out of rewind
or fast forward.
To fast forward the
tape, push the upper side ( ) of the
CH/DISC bar, or touch the FF icon
on the audio display. You will see FF
in the upper display. To rewind the
tape, push the lower side ( ) of the
CH/DISC bar, or touch the REW
icon. You will see REW displayed.
Pressthebarortouchtheiconagain
to take the system out of rewind or
fast forward.
Press the RPT button
or touch the REPEAT icon on the
audio display to continuously play a
song or passage. You will see RPT
displayed. The track will repeat until
you press the button or touch the
icon again.
The skip and repeat
functions use silent periods on the
tape to find the end of a song or
passage. These features may not
work if there is almost no gap
between selections, a high noise
level, or a silent period in the middle
of a selection.
On vehicles with navigation system
On vehicles with navigation system
Tape Search Functions SKIP
FF/REW
FF/REW
REPEAT
Playing a Tape (U.S. Vehicles)
Features
135
NOTE:
06/08/08 14:38:47 31SDR620_140
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
If the tape is loose, tighten it by
turning the hub with a pencil or your
finger. If the label is peeling off,
remove it or it could cause the tape
to jam in the player. Never try to
insert a warped or damaged tape in
the player.
Store tapes in their cases to protect
them from dust and moisture. Never
placetapeswheretheywillbe
exposed to direct sunlight, high heat,
or high humidity. If a tape is exposed
to extreme heat or cold, let it reach a
moderate temperature before
inserting it into the player.
Thetapeplayerpicksupdirtand
oxides from the tape. This
contamination builds up over time
and causes the sound quality to
degrade. To prevent this, you should
clean the player after every 30 hours
of use.
If you do not clean the tape player
regularly, it may eventually become
impossible to remove the
contamination with a normal
cleaning kit. Your dealer has a
cleaning kit available.
Use 100-minute or shorter tapes.
Tapes longer than that may break or
jam in the drive.
Never try to insert foreign objects
into the tape player.
Caring f or the Tape and Player
Playing a Tape (U.S. Vehicles)
136
06/08/08 14:38:54 31SDR620_141
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
XM is a registered trademark of
XM Satellite Radio, Inc.
Satellite radio is available in U.S.
models only.
Your vehicle is capable of receiving
XM
Satellite Radio anywhere in the
United States, except Hawaii and
Alaska.
Satellite Digital Radio
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
Features
137
DISP
BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
TUNE
BAR
CATEGORY/CHANNEL
MODE INDICATOR
CATEGORY/CHANNEL
MODE INDICATOR
PWR/VOL
KNOB
PWR/VOL KNOB PRESET
ICONS
SEEK/
SKIP
BAR
SEEK/
SKIP
BAR
SCAN ICON
MODE ICON
CD/AUX XM
BUTTON
CD/AUX XM
BUTTON
AUDIO
DISPLAY
BUTTON
TUNE
KNOB
PRESET
BARS
Without navigation system With navigation system
06/08/08 14:39:05 31SDR620_142
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
−
−
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
position.
Turn the system on:
Turn the PWR/VOL knob to adjust
the volume.
Push any of the following: PWR/
VOL knob or the CD/AUX XM
button.
Push any of the following: PWR/
VOL knob, the CD/AUX XM, or
AUDIO button.
When in the satellite radio mode,
you can use any of three methods to
find channels: TUNE, SEEK/SKIP
(CATEGORY), and SCAN.
Turn the TUNE knob to change
channels. Turn the knob right for
higher numbered channels and left
for lower numbered channels.
Press the TUNE bar to change
channel selections. Press for
higher numbered channels and
for lower numbered channels.
The
seek/skip function selects the
various categories in XM, such as
Jazz/Blues, Rock, Classical, etc.
Push the to change the
category forward. Push the to
change the category backward. To
search for channels within a
category, turn the TUNE knob
clockwiseorpresstheTUNEbar
.
On vehicles with navigation system
On vehicles without navigation system
On vehicles with navigation system
On vehicles without navigation system
To Select a Channel
TUNE
SEEK/SKIP (CATEGORY)To Play XM Satellite Radio
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
138
06/08/08 14:39:18 31SDR620_143
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
−−
Once your XM channels are preset,
pressing the CH DISC button will
select your preset channels.
The scan function samples
all channels for 5 seconds. To
activate the function, push the SCAN
button. Push it again to get out of the
sequence.
Each preset icon or button
canstoreonechannelinXM1and
one in XM2.
Push the CD/AUX XM button.
(You will see XM1 or XM2.)
Use the TUNE, SEEK or SCAN
function to tune the radio to a
desired channel.
Pick a preset icon or button and
hold it until you hear a beep.
Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a total
of six stations on XM1 and XM2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
On vehicles with navigation system
SCAN Preset
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
Features
139
06/08/08 14:39:26 31SDR620_144
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Satellite radio receives signals from
two satellites to produce clear, high-
quality digital reception. It offers
many channels in several categories.
Along with a large selection of
different types of music, satellite
radio also allows you to view channel
and category selections in the audio
display.
TheXMsatellitesareinorbitover
the equator; therefore, objects south
of the vehicle may cause satellite
reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas. Satellite signals
aremorelikelytobeblockedbytall
buildings and mountains the farther
north you travel from the equator.
Satellite Radio Signals
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
140
SATELLITE
Signals may be blocked by mountains or
large obstacles to the south.
GROUND REPEATER
06/08/08 14:39:33 31SDR620_145
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Depending on where you drive, you
may experience reception problems.
Interference can be caused by any of
these conditions:
Drivingonaneast/westroadwith
a mountain on the south side of
the road.
There may be other geographic
situations that could affect satellite
radio reception.
Driving on a single lane road
alongside dense trees taller than
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.
Driving on the lower level of a
multi-tiered road.
Driving on a road beside a vertical
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south
of you.
Driving in tunnels.
Driving on the north side of a
large commercial truck on an
east/west road.
If your XM Radio service has expired
or you purchased your vehicle from
a previous owner, you can listen to a
sampling of the broadcasts available
on XM Satellite Radio. With the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position, push the
PWR/VOL knob to turn on the audio
system and press the CD/AUX XM
button. A variety of music types and
styles will play.
If you decide to purchase XM
satellite radio service, contact XM
Radio at , or at
1-800-852-9696. You will need to give
them your radio I.D. number and
your credit card number.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
www.xmradio.com
Receiving Satellite Radio Service
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
Features
141
06/08/08 14:39:43 31SDR620_146
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
While awaiting activation, make sure
your vehicle remains in an open area
with good reception. Once your
audio system is activated, ‘‘category’’
or ‘‘CH’’ will appear on the display
and you will be able to listen to XM
Radio broadcasts. XM Radio will
continue to send an activation signal
to your vehicle for at least 12 hours
from activation request. If the
service has not been activated after
36 hours, contact XM Radio.
Turn the TUNE knob until ‘‘0’’
appears in the display. Your I.D. will
appear in the display.
After you have registered with XM
Radio, keep your audio system in the
satellite radio mode while you wait
for activation. This should take about
30 minutes.
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
To get your XM Satellite radio ID
number:
142
06/08/08 14:39:48 31SDR620_147
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
▲▼
＋
−
＋
−
＋
−
The VOL button adjusts the volume
up ( ) or down ( ). Press the top
or bottom of the button, hold it until
the desired volume is reached, then
release it.
IfyouareplayingaCD,thesystem
skips to the beginning of the next
track each time you press the top
( ) of the CH button. Press the
bottom ( ) to return to the
beginning of the current track. Press
it twice to return to the previous
track. You will see the disc and track
numbers on the display.
Ifyouareplayingatapeinthe
optional tape player, press the top
( ) of the CH button to advance to
the next selection. Press the bottom
( ) to go back to the previous
selection. The system senses a silent
period, then resumes playing.
The MODE button changes the
mode. Pressing the button
repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,
XM1, XM2, CD, or a tape.
If you are listening to the radio, use
the CH button to change stations.
Each time you press the top ( ) of
the button, the system goes to the
next preset station on the band you
are listening to. Press the bottom
( ) to go back to the previous
station.
Three controls for the audio system
are mounted in the steering wheel
hub. These let you control basic
functions without removing your
hand from the wheel.
Remote Audio Controls
Features
143
CH BUTTON
VOL BUTTON
MODE BUTTON
06/08/08 14:39:56 31SDR620_148
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
−
If your vehicle’s battery is discon-
nected or goes dead, the audio
system will disable itself. If this
happens, you will see ‘‘CODE’’ in the
frequencydisplaythenexttimeyou
turn on the system. Use the preset
buttons to enter the five-digit code.
Thecodeisontheradiocodecard
included in your owner’s manual kit.
When it is entered correctly, the
radio will start playing.
If ‘‘0’’ is the first digit in your code,
press and release the TUNE knob to
store it.
If your vehicle is equipped with a
navigation system, press and release
the TUNE knob; the number ‘‘0’’
appears on the display.
If you make a mistake entering the
code, do not start over; complete the
five-digit sequence, then enter the
correct code. You have 10 tries to
enter the correct code. If you are
unsuccessful in 10 attempts, you
must then leave the system on for 1
hour before trying again.
If the code card is lost, a dealer can
access your code with your radio’s
serial number. To access the serial
number, turn the radio on. It must
display ‘‘CODE’’, then turn the radio
off. Push the preset 1, preset 6, and
power buttons at the same time, then
quickly release.
If ‘‘0’’ is not the first digit in your
code, turn the TUNE knob left or
right until the first digit is displayed.
Press and release the TUNE knob to
store it. Enter the remaining three
digits the same way.Your vehicle’s audio system will
disable itself if it is disconnected
from electrical power for any reason.
To make it work again, you must
enter a specific five-digit code using
the preset bars or the TUNE knob.
Because there are hundreds of
number combinations possible from
the five digits, making the system
work without knowing the exact
code is nearly impossible.
Youshouldhavereceivedacardthat
lists your audio system code number
and serial number. It is best to store
this card in a safe place at home. In
addition, you should write the audio
system’s serial number in this owner’s
manual.
If you lose the card, you must obtain
the code number from a dealer. To
do this, you will need the system’s
serial number.
You may have to store your favorite
stations on each side of the preset
bars (1 6) after the system begins
working. Your original settings may
have been lost when power was
disconnected.
Radio Theft Protection
144
06/08/08 14:40:05 31SDR620_149
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, you may
need to set the clock.
You can quickly set the time to the
nearest hour. Pressing and holding
the SOUND button, then pressing
theR(Preset6)sideofthebarsets
the clock back to the previous hour.
If the displayed time is after the half
hour, the clock sets the clock
forward to the beginning of the next
hour.
For example:
1:06 would RESET to 1:00.
1:52 would RESET to 2:00.
Refer to the navigation system
owner’s manual to set up the time.
Press and hold the SOUND button
until you hear a beep. The displayed
time begins to blink. Press on the H
(Preset 4) side of the bar until the
numbers advance to the desired time.
Change the minutes by pressing the
M (Preset 5) side of the bar until the
numbers advance to the desired time.
When you are finished, press the
SOUND button again to set the time.
On vehicles with navigation system
On vehicles without navigation system
Setting the Clock
Features
145
DIGITAL CLOCK
SOUND BUTTON
PRESET BARS
(U.S. model shown)
Without navigation system
06/08/08 14:40:15 31SDR620_150
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Once the security system is set,
opening any door (without using the
key or the remote transmitter), the
hood, or the trunk will cause it to
sound. It also sounds if the radio is
removed from the dashboard or the
wiring is cut.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it.
The security system helps to protect
your vehicle and valuables from theft.
The horn sounds and a combination
of headlights, parking lights, side
marker lights and taillights flashes if
someone attempts to break into your
vehicleorremovetheradio.This
alarm continues for two minutes,
then the system resets. To reset an
alarming system before the two
minutes have elapsed, unlock either
front door with the key or the
remote transmitter.
With the system set, you can still
open the trunk with the remote
transmitter without triggering the
alarm. The alarm will sound if the
trunk lock is forced, or the trunk is
opened with the trunk release lever
or the emergency trunk opener.
The security system will not set if
the hood, trunk, or any door is not
fully closed. If the system will not set,
check the door and trunk open
monitor on the instrument panel (see
page ) to see if the doors and
trunk are fully closed. Since it is not
part of the monitor display, manually
check the hood.
The security system automatically
sets 15 seconds after you lock the
doors, hood, and trunk. For the
system to activate, you must lock the
doors from the outside with the key,
lock tab, door lock switch, or remote
transmitter. The security system
indicator on the instrument panel
starts blinking immediately to show
you the system is setting itself.
64
Security System
146
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
06/08/08 14:40:23 31SDR620_151
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speedabove25mph(40km/h).
Cruise control allows you to maintain
asetspeedabove25mph(40km/h)
without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. It should be used
for cruising on straight, open
highways. It is not recommended for
city driving, winding roads, slippery
roads, heavy rain, or bad weather. Cruise control may not hold the set
speed when you are going up and
down hills. If your vehicle speed
increases going down a hill, use the
brakes to slow down. This will cancel
thecruisecontrol.Toresumetheset
speed, press the RES/ACCEL button.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator
on the instrument panel will come
back on.
Push in the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel. The CRUISE
MAIN indicator on the instrument
panel comes on.
Press and release the SET/
DECELbuttononthesteering
wheel. The CRUISE CONTROL
indicator on the instrument panel
comes on to show the system is
now activated.
1.
2.
3.Using the Cruise Control
Cruise Control
Features
147
CANCEL
BUTTON
RES/ACCEL
BUTTON
CRUISE BUTTON
SET/DECEL
BUTTON
Improper use of the cruise
control can lead to a crash.
Use the cruise control only
when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
06/08/08 14:40:32 31SDR620_152
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
You can increase the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Press and hold the RES/ACCEL
button. When you reach the
desired cruising speed, release the
button.
Push on the accelerator pedal.
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed, then press the SET/
DECEL button.
To increase the speed in very
small amounts, tap the RES/
ACCEL button. Each time you do
this, your vehicle will speed up
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
You can decrease the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Press and hold the SET/DECEL
button. Release the button when
you reach the desired speed.
Even with the cruise control turned
on, you can still use the accelerator
pedal to speed up for passing. After
completing the pass, take your foot
off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
will return to the set cruising speed.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal
causes cruise control to cancel.
To slow down in very small
amounts, tap the SET/DECEL
button. Each time you do this,
your vehicle will slow down about
1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Tap the brake pedal lightly with
your foot. The CRUISE
CONTROL indicator on the
instrument panel will go out.
When the vehicle slows to the
desired speed, press the SET/
DECEL button.
Cruise Control
Changing the Set Speed
148
06/08/08 14:40:44 31SDR620_153
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
You can cancel cruise control in any
of these ways:
Push the CANCEL button on the
steering wheel.
Pushthecruisecontrolmaster
button.
Tap the brake pedal.
When you push the CANCEL button,
or tap the brake pedal, the system
will remember the previously-set
cruising speed. To return to that
speed, accelerate to above 25 mph
(40 km/h) and then press and
release the RES/ACCEL button. The
CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes
on. The vehicle will accelerate to the
same cruising speed as before.
Pressing the CRUISE button turns
the system completely off and erases
the previous cruising speed.
Canceling Cruise Control Resuming the Set Speed
Cruise Control
Features
149
06/08/08 14:40:52 31SDR620_154
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
−
Todothis,pressandholdthetwo
outside buttons on the HomeLink
transceiver for about 20 seconds,
until the red indicator flashes.
Release the buttons, then proceed to
step 1.
If you just
received your vehicle and have not
trained any of the buttons in
HomeLink before, you should erase
any previously learned codes before
training the first button.
If you are training the second or
third buttons, go directly to step 1.
Unplug the garage door opener
motor from the electrical outlet.
Holdtheendofthegaragedoor
opener remote 2 to 5 inches from
HomeLink. Make sure you are not
blocking your view of the red
indicator in HomeLink.
The HomeLink
universal
transceiver built into your vehicle
canbeprogrammedtooperateupto
three remotely controlled devices
around your home, such as garage
doors, lighting, or home security
systems.
If you are training HomeLink to
operate a garage door or gate, you
should unplug the motor for that
device during training. Repeatedly
pressing the remote control button
could burn out the motor.
HomeLink stores the code in a
permanent memory. There should
be no need to retrain HomeLink if
your vehicle’s battery goes dead or is
disconnected. If your garage door
opener was manufactured before
April 1982, you may not be able to
program HomeLink to operate it.
They do not have the safety feature
that causes the motor to stop and
reverse if an obstacle is detected
during closing, increasing the risk of
injury.
Always refer to the opening
instructions and safety information
that came with your garage door
opener or other equipment you
intend to operate with HomeLink. If
you do not have this information,
contact the manufacturer of the
equipment.
For quick and accurate training,
make sure the remote transmitter
for the device (garage door,
automatic gate, security system, etc.)
has a fresh battery.
1.
2.
Training HomeLink
General Information
Important Safety Precautions
Before you begin
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
150
06/08/08 14:41:03 31SDR620_155
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Plug in the garage door opener
motor, then test the HomeLink
button by pushing it for about 1
second.
If the button works,
programming is complete.
If the button does not work go
to step 6.
Press and hold the remote
transmitter button and one of the
HomeLink buttons at the same
time.
If the red indicator in HomeLink
begins to flash slowly at first,
then rapidly, release both
buttons, and go to step 5.
Press and hold the remote
transmitter button and one of the
HomeLink buttons at the same
time. While continuing to hold the
HomeLink button, press and
release the remote transmitter
button every 2 seconds.
If the red indicator in HomeLink
begins to flash slowly at first,
then rapidly, release both
buttons, and go to step 5.
If the red indicator in HomeLink
continues to flash slowly (does
not begin to flash rapidly),
repeat steps 2 thru 4.
Repeat these steps to train the
other two HomeLink buttons to
operate any other compatible
remotely controlled devices
around your home (lighting,
automatic gate, security system,
etc.).
If the indicator stays on or
flashes slowly, repeat steps 2
thru 5.
PushandholdtheHomeLink
button for a few seconds, then
watch the red indicator on
HomeLink.
If the red indicator in HomeLink
continues to flash slowly (does
not flash rapidly), your remote
transmitter may stop
transmitting after a short time.
Go to step 4.
If the indicator flashes rapidly
for 2 seconds then stays on, you
have a rolling code transmitter:
go to ‘‘Training with a Rolling
Code System’’ (see page ).
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
152
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Features
151
06/08/08 14:41:18 31SDR620_156
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
For security purposes, newer garage
door opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’
or variable code. Information from
the remote control and the garage
door opener is needed before
HomeLink can operate the garage
door opener.
Find the ‘‘training’’ button on your
garage door opener unit. The
location will vary, depending on
the manufacturer.
Make sure you have properly
completed the ‘‘Training
HomeLink’’ procedure.
Press the HomeLink button again
for about 1 second. It should
operate the garage door.
The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’
procedure trains HomeLink to the
proper garage door opener code.
The following procedure
synchronizes HomeLink to the
garage door opener so it sends and
receives the correct codes.
Press the training button on the
garage door opener unit until the
indicator next to the button comes
on. The indicator may blink, or
comeonandstayon.Youthen
have approximately 30 seconds to
complete the following steps.
Press and hold the button on
HomeLink for 3 to 4 seconds.
Press and hold the HomeLink
button again for 3 to 4 seconds.
This should turn off the training
indicator on the garage door
opener unit. (Some systems may
require you to press the button up
to three times.)
6.
2.
4.
5.
1.
3.
Training With a Rolling Code
System
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
152
TRAINING BUTTON
06/08/08 14:41:28 31SDR620_157
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Youshoulderaseallthreecodes
before selling the vehicle.
Toerasethecodesstoredinallthree
buttons, press and hold the two
outside buttons until the red
indicator begins to flash, then
release the buttons.
If you want to retrain a programmed
button for a new device, you do not
have to erase all button memory.
You can replace the existing memory
code using this procedure:
If a standard transmitter was
programmed, the indicator will
stay on for about 25 seconds.
HomeLink
is a registered
trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.
If you have problems with training
the HomeLink Universal Transceiver,
or would like information on home
products that can be operated by
HomeLink, call (800) 355-3515. On
the Internet, go to
www.homelink.com.
Once the HomeLink indicator
begins to flash slowly, continue to
hold the HomeLink button, and
follow steps 3 thru 6 under
‘‘Training HomeLink’’ (see page
).
If a rolling code transmitter was
previously programmed, the
indicator will flash rapidly for 2
seconds, and then stay on for
about 23 seconds.
Press and hold the HomeLink
button to be trained until the
HomeLink indicator begins to
flash slowly.
1.
2.
150
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Erasing Codes
Retraining a Button
Customer Assistance
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Features
153
06/08/08 14:41:41 31SDR620_158
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
▲
▼
background
Before you begin driving your
vehicle, you should know what
gasoline to use and how to check the
levels of important fluids. You also
need to know how to properly store
luggage or packages. The
information in this section will help
you. If you plan to add any
accessories to your vehicle, please
read the information in this section
first.
.............................Break-in Period . 156
.................Fuel Recommendation . 156
.........Service Station Procedures . 157
....................................Refueling . 157
OpeningandClosingthe
.......................................Hood . 158
...................................Oil Check . 159
.............Engine Coolant Check . 160
...............................Fuel Economy . 161
........Improving Fuel Economy . 161
...Accessories and Modifications . 162
................................Accessories . 162
...........Modifying Your Vehicle . 163
.............................Carrying Cargo . 164
................................Load Limits . 165
Carrying Cargo in the Trunk
.................or on a Roof Rack . 166
Carrying Cargo in the
.....Passenger Compartment . 166
............IMA Battery Air Intake . 167
...............IMA Battery Air Vent . 167
Before Driving
Before Driving
155
06/08/08 14:41:48 31SDR620_160
Main Menu
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
background
Help assure your vehicle’s future
reliability and performance by paying
extra attention to how you drive
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km).
During this period:
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid
acceleration.
Do not change the oil until the
scheduled maintenance time.
Avoidhardbrakingforthefirst
200 miles (300 km).
Do not tow a trailer.
You should also follow these
recommendations with an
overhauled or exchanged engine, or
when the brakes are replaced.
Your vehicle is designed to operate
on unleaded gasoline with a pump
octane number of 87 or higher. Use
of a lower octane gasoline can cause
a persistent, heavy metallic rapping
noise that can lead to engine damage.
We recommend quality gasoline
containing detergent additives that
help prevent fuel system and engine
deposits.
In addition, in order to maintain good
performance, fuel economy, and
emissions control, we strongly
recommend, in areas where it is
available, the use of gasoline that
does NOT contain manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT.
Some gasoline today is blended with
oxygenates such as ethanol or
MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to
operate on oxygenated gasoline
containing up to 10 % ethanol by
volume and up to 15 % MTBE by
volume. Do not use gasoline
containing methanol.
If you notice any undesirable
operating symptoms, try another
service station or switch to another
brand of gasoline.
For further important fuel-related
information, please refer to your
.
Use of gasoline with these additives
may adversely affect performance,
and cause the malfunction indicator
lamp on your instrument panel to
come on. If this happens, contact
your dealer for service.
Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation
Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation
Quick Start Guide
156
06/08/08 14:42:00 31SDR620_161
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
background
Removethefuelfillcapslowly.
You may hear a hissing sound as
pressure inside the tank escapes.
The fuel fill cap is attached to the
fuel filler with a tether. Put the
attachment on the fuel fill cap into
the slit on the fuel fill door.
Stop filling the tank after the fuel
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leave
some room for the fuel to expand
with temperature changes.
Park with the driver’s side closest
to the gas pump.
To open the fuel fill door, push
down on the lever located to the
left of the driver’s seat.
even though the tank is not full,
there may be a problem with your
vehicle’s fuel vapor recovery
system. The system helps keep
fuel vapor from going into the
atmosphere. Try filling at another
pump. If this does not fix the
problem, consult your dealer.
3.
4.
1.
2.
If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off
CONTINUED
Refueling
Service Station Procedure
Before Driving
157
FUEL FILL CAP
Push
TETHER
Gasoline is highly flammable
and explosive. You can be
burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
Stop the engine, and keep
heat, sparks, and flames
away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
06/08/08 14:42:11 31SDR620_162
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
To Open the Hood:
Park the vehicle, and set the
parking brake. Pull the hood
release handle located under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
The hood will pop up slightly.
Put your fingers under the front
edge of the hood near the center.
Slide your hand to the left until
you feel the hood latch handle.
Push this handle up to release it.
Lift up the hood.
If the hood latch handle moves stiffly,
or if you can open the hood without
lifting the handle, the mechanism
should be cleaned and lubricated.
Push the fuel fill door closed until
it latches.
Screw the fuel fill cap back on
until it clicks at least once. If you
do not properly tighten the cap,
the malfunction indicator lamp
maycomeon(seepage ).You
will also see a ‘‘CHECK FUEL
CAP’’ message on the information
display.
1.
2.
5.
6.
246
Opening and Closing the Hood
Service Station Procedure
158
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE LATCH
06/08/08 14:42:21 31SDR620_163
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Remove the dipstick again, and
check the level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
If it is near or below the lower mark,
see on page .
Insert the dipstick all the way back
into its hole.
Remove the dipstick (orange
handle).
Wait a few minutes after turning the
engine off before you check the oil.
Lift the hood up most of the way.
The hydraulic supports will lift it up
therestofthewayandholditup.
To close the hood, lower the hood to
about a foot (30 cm) above the
fender, then firmly press down on
the front edge of the hood. Make
sure it is securely latched.
Wipe off the dipstick with a clean
cloth or paper towel.
1.
2.
3.
4.
203Adding Oil
Oil Check
Service Station Procedure
Before Driving
159
DIPSTICK
(orange handle)
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
06/08/08 14:42:34 31SDR620_164
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Look at the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the MAX and MIN lines. If
it is below the MIN line, see
on page for
information on adding the proper
coolant.
Refer to
on page for information
about checking other items on your
vehicle.
207
198
Engine Coolant Check
Adding
Engine Coolant
Owner’s Maintenance
Checks
Service Station Procedure
160
MAX
RESERVE TANK
MIN
06/08/08 14:42:40 31SDR620_165
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Always drive in the highest gear
possible.
Try to maintain a constant speed.
Everytimeyouslowdownand
speed up, your vehicle uses extra
fuel. Use cruise control when
appropriate.
Combine several short trips into
one.
The air conditioning puts an extra
load on the engine which makes it
usemorefuel.Usethefresh-air
ventilation when possible.
Always maintain your vehicle
according to the maintenance
messages displayed on the
information display. See
on page
.
Drive moderately. Rapid
acceleration, abrupt cornering,
and hard braking use more fuel.
The build-up of snow or mud on
your vehicle’s underside adds
weight and rolling resistance.
Frequent cleaning helps your fuel
mileage and reduces the chance of
corrosion.
an underinflated tire
causes more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’
which uses more fuel.
198
For example,
Improving Fuel Economy
Owner’s
Maintenance Checks
Fuel Economy
Before Driving
161
06/08/08 14:42:48 31SDR620_166
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Before installing any accessory:
Make sure the accessory does not
obscure any lights, or interfere
with proper vehicle operation or
performance.
When properly installed, cellular
phones, alarms, two-way radios, and
low-powered audio systems should
not interfere with your vehicle’s
computer controlled systems, such
as your airbags and anti-lock brakes.
Modifying your vehicle, or installing
some non-Honda accessories, can
make your vehicle unsafe. Before
you make any modifications or add
anyaccessories,besuretoreadthe
following information.
Your dealer has Honda accessories
that allow you to personalize your
vehicle. These accessories have
been designed and approved for your
vehicle, and are covered by warranty.
Although non-Honda accessories
may fit on your vehicle, they may not
meet factory specifications, and
could adversely affect your vehicle’s
handling and stability.
Do not install accessories on the
side pillars or across the rear
windows. In these areas,
accessories may interfere with
proper operation of the side
curtain airbags.
Before installing any electronic
accessory, have the installer
contact your dealer for assistance.
If possible, have your dealer
inspect the final installation.
Be sure electronic accessories do
not overload electrical circuits
(see page ) or interfere with
the proper operation of your
vehicle.
249
Accessories
Accessories and Modifications
162
Improper accessories or
modifications can affect your
vehicle’s handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a
crash in which you can be hurt
or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding
accessories and modifications.
06/08/08 14:43:00 31SDR620_167
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Removing parts from your vehicle,
or replacing components with
aftermarket components could
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, and reliability.
Larger or smaller wheels and tires
can interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and
other systems.
If you plan to modify your vehicle,
consult your dealer.
Modifying your steering wheel or
any other part of your vehicle’s
safety features can make the
systems ineffective.Lowering the vehicle with a non-
Honda suspension kit that
significantly reduces ground
clearance can allow the
undercarriage to hit speed bumps
or other raised objects, which
could cause the airbags to deploy.
Raising your vehicle with a
non-Honda suspension kit can
affect the handling and stability.
Non-Honda wheels can cause
excessive stress on suspension
components.
Herearesomeexamples:
Modifying Your Vehicle
Accessories and Modifications
Before Driving
163
06/08/08 14:43:09 31SDR620_168
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Your vehicle has several convenient
storage areas:
Glove box
Roof-rack (if installed)
Console compartment
Center pocket
Trunk
Door pockets
Seat-back pockets
However, carrying too much cargo
or improperly storing it can affect
your vehicle’s handling, stability,
stopping distance, and tires, and
make it unsafe. Before carrying any
type of cargo, be sure to read the
following pages.
Carrying Cargo
164
GLOVE BOX
TRUNK
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
CENTER POCKET
DOOR POCKETS
SEAT-BACK POCKETS
06/08/08 14:43:19 31SDR620_169
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
−×
Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in step 4.
Ifyourvehiclewillbetowinga
trailer, the load from your trailer
will be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of
yourvehicle(seepage ).
The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity.
For example, if the maximum load
is 850 lbs and there will be five 150
lb passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 100 lbs.
(850 750 (5 150) = 100 lbs.)
Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
Locate the statement, ‘‘the
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed 850
lbs’’ on your vehicle’s placard.
[The placard is on the driver’s
doorjamb.]
Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit:
Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
850 lbs.
The maximum load for your vehicle
is 850 lbs (395 kg). This figure
includes the total weight of all
occupants, cargo, and accessories,
and the tongue load if you are towing
a trailer.
In addition, the total weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, accessories,
cargo, and trailer tongue load must
not exceed the gross vehicle weight
rating (GVWR) or the gross axle
weight rating (GAWR). Both are on
a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
1.
2.
5.
6.
3.
4.
185
Load Limits
Carrying Cargo
Before Driving
165
Overloading or improper
loading can affect handling and
stability and cause a crash in
which you can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this
manual.
06/08/08 14:43:31 31SDR620_170
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Store or secure all items that could
be thrown around and hurt
someone during a crash.
If you carry large items that
prevent you from closing the trunk
lid, exhaust gas can enter the
passenger area. To avoid the
possibility of
, follow the instructions
on page .
If you carry any items on a roof
rack, be sure the total weight of
the rack and the items does not
exceed 165 lbs (75 kg).
If you use an accessory roof rack,
the roof rack weight limit may be
lower. Refer to the information that
came with your roof rack.
Do not put any items on top of the
rear shelf. They can block your
viewandbethrownaroundthe
vehicle during a crash.
Besureitemsplacedonthefloor
behind the front seats cannot roll
under the seats and interfere with
the driver’s ability to operate the
pedals or the seat.
Keep the glove box closed while
driving so that someone in the
passenger seat can avoid injuries
to their knees in a crash or a
sudden stop.
Do not put any objects on the IMA
battery air intake on the rear shelf
(see page ).
Distribute cargo evenly on the
floor of the trunk, placing the
heaviest items on the bottom and
as far forward as possible. Tie
down items that could be thrown
about the vehicle during a crash or
sudden stop.
Do not store any perishable items
near the IMA battery vent (see
page ).167
54
167
carbon monoxide
poisoning
Carrying Cargo in the Passenger
Compartment
Carrying Cargo in the Trunk or on
a Roof Rack
Carrying Cargo
166
06/08/08 14:43:43 31SDR620_171
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Do not spill any liquids over the air
intake or put any small foreign
objects in it. This may damage the
IMA battery and the power control
unit.
Air used to cool the IMA battery is
vented into the right side of the
trunk. Do not leave perishable items
near this vent.
The air intake for the IMA battery
and electronics is located on top of
the rear shelf. Do not block this air
intake; it may cause the IMA battery
and the power control unit to
overheat, causing the IMA system to
shut down. It will start working again
after it cools.
Carrying Cargo
IMA Battery Air Intake IMA Battery Air Vent
Before Driving
167
AIR INTAKE AIR VENT
06/08/08 14:43:51 31SDR620_172
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
▲
▼
background
This section gives you tips on
starting the engine under various
conditions, and how to operate the
automatic transmission. It also
includes important information on
parking your vehicle, the braking
system, the vehicle stability assist
(VSA) system, and facts you need if
you are planning to tow a trailer.
........................Preparing to Drive . 170
.......................Starting the Engine . 171
..............Automatic Transmission . 172
Shift Lever Position
...............................Indicators . 172
.......................................Shifting . 172
..............Engine Speed Limiter . 174
....................Shift Lock Release . 175
............................Auto Idle Stop . 177
...........Auto Idle Stop Indicator . 178
...........................................Parking . 179
.............................Braking System . 180
...........Braking System Design . 180
.....Brake Pad Wear Indicators . 180
...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 181
............................ABS Indicator . 181
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)
....................................System . 183
.........VSA Activation Indicator . 183
..............VSA System Indicator . 183
.........................VSA Off Switch . 184
...................VSA and Tire Sizes . 184
...........................Towing a Trailer . 185
Driving
Driving
169
06/08/08 14:43:58 31SDR620_174
Main Menu
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
background
Youshoulddothefollowingchecks
and adjustments before you drive
your vehicle.
Make sure all windows, mirrors,
and outside lights are clean and
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice.
Make sure the doors are securely
closed and locked.
Fasten your seat belt. Check that
your passengers have fastened
their seat belts (see page ).
Check the steering wheel
adjustment (see page ).
Check that the hood is fully closed.
Check that the trunk is fully
closed.
Visually check the tires. If a tire
looks low, use a gauge to check its
pressure.
Check that any items you may be
carrying are stored properly or
fastened down securely.
Check the seat adjustment (see
pages to ).
Check the adjustment of the
inside and outside mirrors (see
pages and ).
When you start the engine, check
the gauges and indicators in the
instrument panel (see pages to
).
3.
2.
1.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
11.
10.
16
90 92
93 94
80
73
59
Preparing to Drive
170
06/08/08 14:44:11 31SDR620_175
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
background
Apply the parking brake.
In cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories to reduce
the drain on the battery.
Make sure the shift lever is in
Park. Press on the brake pedal.
If the engine does not start within
15 seconds, or starts but stalls
right away, repeat step 4 with the
accelerator pedal pressed halfway
down. If the engine starts, release
pressure on the accelerator pedal
so the engine does not race.
In cold weather, conventional starter
is used instead of the IMA system
starter. This is normal.
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition key to the
START (III) position. Do not hold
the key in the START (III)
position for more than 15 seconds
at a time. If the engine does not
start right away, pause for at least
10 seconds before trying again. If the engine fails to start, press
the accelerator pedal all the way
down, and hold it there while
starting to clear flooding. If the
engine still does not start, return
to step 5.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
82
Starting the Engine
Starting in Cold Weather
Driving
171
The immobilizer system protects your
vehicle from theft. If an improperly-
coded key (or other device) is used, the
engine’s fuel system is disabled. For
more information, see page .
The engine is harder to start in cold
weather. Also, the thinner air found at
altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400
meters) adds to this problem.
06/08/08 14:44:22 31SDR620_176
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
If the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on along with the ‘‘D’’
indicator, there is a problem with the
automatic transmission control
system. Avoid rapid acceleration and
have the transmission checked by
your dealer as soon as possible.
To shift from Park to any position,
press firmly on the brake pedal and
pressthereleasebuttononthefront
of the shift lever, then pull the lever.
YoucannotshiftoutofParkwhen
the ignition switch is in the LOCK
(0) or the ACCESSORY (I) position.
The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it flashes while driving (in
any shift position), it indicates a
possible problem in the transmission.
These indicators between the tacho-
meter and speedometer show which
position the shift lever is in.
To shift from:
PtoR
RtoP
NtoR
Dto2
2to1
1to2
2toD
DtoD
DtoN
DtoD
NtoD
RtoN
Do this:
Press the brake pedal and
press the release button.
Press the release button.
Move the lever.
3
3
3
3
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lever Position Indicators
Shifting
172
SHIFT LEVER
RELEASE BUTTON
06/08/08 14:44:32 31SDR620_177
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
−−
−
−
−
If you have done all of the above and
still cannot move the lever out of
Park, see on
page .
You must also press the release
button to shift into Park. To avoid
transmission damage, come to a
complete stop before shifting into
Park. The shift lever must be in Park
before you can remove the key from
the ignition switch.
Press the brake
pedal and press the release button to
shift from Park to Reverse. To shift
from Reverse to Neutral, come to a
completestopandthenshift.
This position is similar
to D, except only the first three
gears are selected instead of all five.
Use D when towing a trailer in hilly
terrain, or to provide engine braking
when going down a steep hill. D can
also keep the transmission from
cycling between third and fourth
gears in stop-and-go driving.
Use this position for
your normal driving. The
transmission automatically selects a
suitable gear for the vehicle speed
and acceleration. You may notice the
transmission shifting up at higher
speeds when the engine is cold. This
helps the engine warm up faster.
Use Neutral if you
need to restart a stalled engine, or if
it is necessary to stop briefly with
the engine idling. Shift to the Park
position if you need to leave your
vehicle and apply the parking brake.
Press on the brake pedal when you
are moving the shift lever from
Neutral to another gear.
This position mechani-
cally locks the transmission. Use
Park whenever you are turning off or
starting the engine. To shift out of
Park, you must press on the brake
pedal and have your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Press the release
buttononthefrontoftheshiftlever
to move it.
175
3
3
CONTINUED
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock Release
Reverse (R) Drive (D )
Drive (D)
Neutral (N)
Park (P)
3
Driving
173
06/08/08 14:44:40 31SDR620_178
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
−−This position locks
the transmission in second gear. It
does not downshift to first gear
when you come to a stop.
Use second gear:
For starting out on a slippery
surface or in deep snow.
To help reduce wheel spin.
When driving downhill with a
trailer.
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
rpm below the red zone.
For more power when climbing.
To increase engine braking when
going down steep hills.
To shift from second to
first, press the release button on the
front of the shift lever. This position
locks the transmission in first gear.
By upshifting and downshifting
through 1, 2, D , and D, you can
operate this transmission much like
a manual transmission without a
clutch pedal.
3
Automatic Transmission
Second (2) Engine Speed LimiterFirst (1)
174
06/08/08 14:44:49 31SDR620_179
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Put a cloth on the edge of the shift
lock release slot cover next to the
shift lever. Use a small flat-tipped
screwdriverorfingernailfileto
remove the cover. Carefully pry
off the edge of the cover.
Insert the key in the shift lock
release slot.This allows you to move the shift
lever out of Park if the normal
method of pushing on the brake
pedal and pressing the release
button does not work.
Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
Set the parking brake.1.
2.
3.
4.
CONTINUED
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock Release
Driving
175
COVER
06/08/08 14:44:57 31SDR620_180
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Push down on the key while you
pressthereleasebuttononthe
shift lever and move the shift lever
out of Park to neutral.
Remove the key from the Shift
Lock Release slot, then reinstall
thecover.Makesurethenotchon
the cover is on the left side.
Depress the brake pedal and
restart the engine.
If you need to use the shift lock
release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have the
vehicle checked by your dealer.
5.
6.
Automatic Transmission
176
RELEASE
BUTTON
SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT
06/08/08 14:45:03 31SDR620_181
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
−
−
The engine restarts when you
release the brake pedal. Even while
you are pressing down on the brake
pedal, the engine restarts if the
conditions below are met.
You move the shift lever from N to
R, or from D3 to 2nd.
Youstepontheacceleratorpedal.
Your vehicle has an auto idle stop
system. After your vehicle comes to
a halt, the engine shuts off
automatically if all the following
conditions are met.
The vehicle speed is over 8 mph
(12km/h)beforethevehicle
comes to a stop.
The engine coolant is nearly up to
normal operating temperature.
TheshiftleverisinD,D3orN.
You are pressing on the brake
pedal.
You are not pressing on the
accelerator pedal.
The IMA battery is charged
enough to operate the system.
Fan speed lower fan speeds, in
either AUTO or manual modes.
During Auto Idle Stop, the IMA
charge and power brake vacuum
reserve is monitored by the system.
If the vacuum reserve drops below
an optimal level, the engine will
restart to replenish the vacuum
supply. If the IMA charge drops
below an optimal level, the engine
will restart to recharge the IMA
battery.
The auto idle stop system may not
work if the temperature of the IMA
battery is extremely high or
extremely low.
While the auto idle stop system is
working, the auto idle stop indicator
blinks (see page ).
Outside temperature is between
10 100 degrees F.
The vent mode is neither in
nor .
178
Automatic Transmission
Auto Idle Stop
Driving
177
06/08/08 14:45:18 31SDR620_182
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
If you open the driver’s door when
Auto Stop is active, the indicator will
blink and you will hear a continuous
beep. The beep will stop when you
close the door.
With the driver’s door open, you will
hear a continuous beep even if the
Auto Idle Stop function is
deactivated and the engine restarts.
Always turn the ignition switch to
the LOCK (0) position and remove
the key if you are getting out of the
vehicle.The indicator blinks as a reminder
that the engine has stopped because
of the Auto Idle Stop function. You
cannot restart the engine with the
ignition switch when this indicator is
blinking.
Automatic Transmission
Auto Idle Stop Indicator
178
AUTO IDLE STOP INDICATOR
06/08/08 14:45:25 31SDR620_183
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Always use the parking brake when
you park your vehicle. Make sure
the parking brake is set firmly, or
your vehicle may roll if it is parked
on an incline.
Set the parking brake before you put
the transmission in Park. This keeps
the vehicle from moving and putting
pressure on the parking mechanism
in the transmission.
If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
the front wheels away from the
curb.
If the vehicle is facing downhill,
turn the front wheels toward the
curb.
Make sure the parking brake is
fully released before driving away.
Driving with the parking brake
partially set can overheat or
damage the rear brakes.
Make sure the moonroof and the
windows are closed.
Check the indicator on the
instrument panel to verify that the
security system is set.
Lockthedoorswiththekeyorthe
remote transmitter.
Place any packages, valuables, etc.,
in the trunk or take them with you.
Turn off the lights.
Never park over dry leaves, tall
grass, or other flammable
materials. The hot three way
catalytic converter could cause
these materials to catch on fire.
Parking Tips
Parking
Driving
179
06/08/08 14:45:36 31SDR620_184
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Check the brakes after driving
through deep water. Apply the
brakes moderately to see if they feel
normal. If not, apply them gently and
frequently until they do. Be extra
cautious in your driving.
The hydraulic system that operates
the brakes has two separate circuits.
Each circuit works diagonally across
the vehicle (the left-front brake is
connected with the right-rear brake,
etc.). If one circuit should develop a
problem, you will still have braking
at two wheels.
Your vehicle is equipped with disc
brakes. A power assist helps reduce
the effort needed on the brake pedal.
The ABS helps you retain steering
control when braking very hard.
Put your foot on the brake pedal only
when you intend to brake. Resting
your foot on the pedal keeps the
brakes applied lightly, builds up heat,
increases wear and reduces their
effectiveness. It also keeps your
brake lights on all the time,
confusing drivers behind you.
Constant application of the brakes
when going down a long hill builds
up heat and reduces their effective-
ness. Use the engine to assist the
brakes by taking your foot off the
accelerator and downshifting to a
lower gear.
If the brake pads need replacing, you
will hear a distinctive, metallic
screeching sound when you apply
the brake pedal. If you do not have
the brake pads replaced, they will
screech all the time. It is normal for
the brakes to occasionally squeal or
squeak when you apply them.
Braking System
Braking System Design
Brake Pad Wear Indicators
180
06/08/08 14:45:44 31SDR620_185
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
CONTINUED
The anti-lock brake system (ABS)
helpspreventthewheelsfrom
locking up, and helps you retain
steering control by pumping the
brakes rapidly, much faster than a
person can do it.
The electronic brake distribution
(EBD) system, which is part of the
ABS, also balances the front-to-rear
braking distribution according to
vehicle loading.
this defeats the purpose of the ABS.
Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the
brake pedal as you steer away from
the hazard. This is sometimes
referred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’
You will feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal when the ABS activates, and
you may hear some noise. This is
normal: it is the ABS rapidly
pumpingthebrakes.Ondry
pavement, you will need to press on
thebrakepedalveryhardbeforethe
ABS activates. However, you may
feel the ABS activate immediately if
you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
If this indicator comes on, the anti-
lock function of the braking system
has shut down. The brakes still work
like a conventional system, but
without anti-lock. You should have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible.
If the ABS indicator and the brake
system indicator come on together,
and the parking brake is fully
released, the EBD system may also
be shut down.
You should never pump the brake pedal;
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
ABS Indicator
Driving
181
06/08/08 14:45:52 31SDR620_186
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
on loose or
uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow, than a vehicle without anti-
lock. Slow down, and allow a greater
distance between vehicles under
those conditions.
It only helps with the
steering control during braking.
such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe
speed for the road and weather
conditions.
Always steer moderately
when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your vehicle to veer
into oncoming traffic or off the road.
Test your brakes as instructed on
page . If the brakes feel normal,
drive slowly and have your vehicle
repaired by your dealer as soon as
possible. Avoid sudden hard braking
which could cause the rear wheels to
lock up and possibly lead to a loss of
control.
The VSA indicator will come on
alongwiththeABSindicator.
247
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
A vehicle with ABS may require a
longer distance to stop
Important Safety Reminders
ABS does not reduce the time or
distance it takes to stop the
vehicle.
ABS will not prevent a skid that
results from changing direction
abruptly,
ABS cannot prevent a loss of
stability.
182
06/08/08 14:46:00 31SDR620_187
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
The vehicle stability assist (VSA)
system helps to stabilize the vehicle
during cornering if the vehicle turns
more or less than desired. It also
assists you in maintaining traction
while accelerating on loose or
slippery road surfaces. It does this
by regulating the engine’s output and
by selectively applying the brakes.
When VSA activates, you may notice
that the engine does not respond to
the accelerator in the same way it
does at other times. There may also
be some noise from the modulator.
The VSA system cannot enhance the
vehicle’s driving stability in all
situations and does not control your
vehicle’s entire braking system. It is
still your responsibility to drive and
corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.
When VSA activates, you will see the
VSA activation indicator blink. There
mayalsobesomenoisefromthe
modulator.
If the VSA system indicator comes
on while driving, pull to the side of
theroadwhenitissafe,andturnoff
the engine. Reset the system by
restarting the engine. If the VSA
system indicator stays, or comes
back on while driving, have the VSA
system inspected by your dealer.
If the indicator does not come on
when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON (II) position, there may be a
problem with the VSA system. Have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible.
Without VSA, your vehicle will have
normal braking and cornering ability,
but it will not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement.
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
VSA Activation Indicator
VSA System Indicator
Driving
183
06/08/08 14:46:10 31SDR620_188
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
In certain unusual conditions when
your vehicle gets stuck in shallow
mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
to free it with the VSA temporarily
switched off. When the VSA system
is off, the traction control system is
alsooff.Youshouldonlyattemptto
free your vehicle with the VSA off if
you are not able to free it when the
VSA is on.
Immediately after freeing your
vehicle, be sure to switch the VSA on
again. We do not recommend driving
your vehicle with the VSA and
traction control systems switched off.
This switch is under the left vent.
Press it to turn the VSA system on
and off.
When VSA is off, the VSA activation
indicator comes on as a reminder.
VSA is turned on every time you
start the engine, even if you turned it
off the last time you drove the
vehicle.
Driving with varying tire or wheel
sizes may cause the VSA to
malfunction. When replacing tires,
make sure they are of the same size
and type as your original tires (see
page ).
Deactivate the VSA system if you
need to drive with the compact spare
tire installed (see page ).
If you install winter tires, make sure
they are the same size as those that
were originally supplied with your
vehicle. Exercise the same caution
during winter driving as you would if
your vehicle was not equipped with
VSA.
226
234
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
VSA Off Switch VSA and Tire Sizes
184
VSA OFF SWITCH
06/08/08 14:46:21 31SDR620_189
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Your vehicle has been designed
primarily to carry passengers and
their cargo. You can also use it to
tow a trailer if you carefully observe
the load limits, use the proper
equipment, and follow the guidelines
in this section.
The
maximum allowable weight of the
trailer and everything in or on it
must not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg).
Towing a load that is too heavy
can seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling and performance. It can
also damage the engine and
drivetrain.
The weight that
the tongue of a fully-loaded trailer
puts on the hitch should be
approximately 10 percent of the
trailer weight. Too much tongue
load reduces front-tire traction and
steering control. Too little tongue
load can make the trailer unstable
and cause it to sway.
CONTINUED
Load Limits
Total Trailer Weight: Tongue Load:
Towing a Trailer
Driving
185
Exceeding any load limit or
improperly loading your vehicle
and trailer can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt
or killed.
Check the loading of your
vehicle and trailer carefully
beforestartingtodrive.
06/08/08 14:46:28 31SDR620_190
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
To achieve a proper tongue load,
start by loading 60 % of the load
toward the front of the trailer and
40 % toward the rear, then re-adjust
the load as needed.
The total weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all cargo, and the
tongue load must not exceed:
The total weight of each axle must
not exceed:
The best way to confirm that vehicle
and trailer weights are within limits
is to have them checked at a public
scale. To locate the public scales in
your area, consult your local yellow
pages or ask your dealer for
assistance.
Using a suitable scale or a special
tongue load gauge, check the tongue
load the first time you set up a
towing combination (a fully-loaded
vehicle and trailer), then recheck the
tongue load whenever the conditions
change.
on the front axle
on the rear axle
Checking Loads
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR):
Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR):
Towing a Trailer
186
4,564 lbs (2,070 kg)
2,469 lbs (1,120 kg)
2,138 lbs (970 kg)
06/08/08 14:46:37 31SDR620_191
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Honda recommends that any trailer
having a total weight of 1,000 lbs
(450 kg) or more be equipped with
its own electric or surge-type brakes.
If you choose electric brakes, be
sure they are electronically actuated.
Do not attempt to tap into your
vehicle’s hydraulic system. No
matter how successful it may seem,
any attempt to attach trailer brakes
to your vehicle’s hydraulic system
will lower braking effectiveness and
create a potential hazard.
See your trailer dealer or rental
agency for more information on
installing electric brakes.
Any hitch used on your vehicle must
be properly bolted to the underbody.
Always use safety chains when you
tow a trailer. Make sure the chains
are secured to the trailer and hitch,
and that they cross under the tongue
and can catch the trailer if it
becomes unhitched. Leave enough
slack to allow the trailer to turn
corners easily, but do not let the
chains drag on the ground.
Towing can require a variety of
equipment, depending on the size of
your trailer, how it will be used, how
much load you are towing, and
where you tow. To ensure the best
quality, we recommend that you
purchase Honda equipment
whenever possible.
Discuss your needs with your trailer
sales or rental agency, and follow the
guidelines in the rest of this section.
Also make sure that all equipment is
properly installed and that it meets
federal, state, province, and local
regulations.
Towing Equipment and
Accessories
Trailer BrakesHitches
Safety Chains
Towing a Trailer
Driving
187
06/08/08 14:46:47 31SDR620_192
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Ask your trailer sales or rental
agency if any other items are
recommended or required for your
towing situation.
Since lighting and wiring vary by
trailer type and brand, you should
have a qualified technician install a
suitable connector between the
vehicle and the trailer. Improper
equipment or installation can cause
damage to your vehicle’s electrical
system and affect your vehicle
warranty.
Trailer lights and equipment must
comply with federal and state
regulations. Check with your trailer
sales or rental agency for the
requirements in your area, and use
only equipment designed for your
vehicle.
Many states and provinces require
special outside mirrors when towing
a trailer. Even if they don’t, you
should install special mirrors if you
cannot clearly see behind you, or if
the trailer creates a blind spot.
Trailer Lights Additional Towing Equipment
Towing a Trailer
188
06/08/08 14:46:54 31SDR620_193
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
When preparing to tow, and before
driving away, be sure to check the
following:
The vehicle has been properly
serviced, and the tires, brakes,
suspension, cooling system, and
lights are in good operating
condition.
The lights and brakes on your
vehicle and the trailer are working
properly.
All items in or on the trailer are
properly secured and cannot shift
while you drive.
Thehitch,safetychains,andany
other attachments are secure.
All weights and loads are within
limits (see pages and ).
Your vehicle tires and spare are
properly inflated (see page ),
and the trailer tires and spare are
inflated as recommended by the
trailer maker.
Foryoursafetyandthesafetyof
others,taketimetopracticedriving
maneuvers before heading for the
open road, and follow the guidelines
below.
The added weight, length, and
height of a trailer will affect your
vehicle’s handling and performance,
so driving with a trailer requires
some special driving skills and
techniques.
Driveslowerthannormalinall
driving situations, and obey posted
speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
UsetheDpositionwhentowinga
trailer on level roads. Do not exceed
55 mph (88 km/h). At higher speeds,
thetrailermayswayoraffectvehicle
handling.
D is the proper shift lever position
tousewhentowingatrailerinhilly
terrain.185 186
224
3
Pre-Tow Checklist
Driving Saf ely With a Trailer
Towing Speeds and Gears
Towing a Trailer
Driving
189
06/08/08 14:47:07 31SDR620_194
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Maketurnsmoreslowlyandwider
than normal. The trailer tracks a
smaller arc than your vehicle, and it
canhitorrunoversomethingthe
vehicle misses. Allow more time and
distance for braking. Do not brake or
turn suddenly as this could cause the
trailer to jackknife or turn over.
When climbing hills, closely watch
your temperature gauge. If it nears
the red (Hot) mark, turn the air
conditioning off, reduce speed and, if
necessary, pull to the side of the
road to let the engine cool.
Always drive slowly and have
someone guide you when backing up.
Grip the of the steering
wheel; then turn the wheel to the left
to get the trailer to move to the left,
andturnthewheelrighttomovethe
trailer to the right.
Follow all normal precautions when
parking, including firmly setting the
parking brake and putting the
transmission in Park. Also, place
wheel chocks at each of the trailer’s
tires.
Crosswinds and air turbulence
caused by passing trucks can disrupt
your steering and cause the trailer to
sway. When being passed by a large
vehicle, keep a constant speed, and
steer straight ahead. Do not try to
make quick steering or braking
corrections.
When driving down hills, reduce
your speed, and shift down to second
gear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, and
remember, it will take longer to slow
downandstopwhentowingatrailer.
If you must stop when facing uphill,
use the foot brake or parking brake.
Do not try to hold the vehicle in
placebypressingontheaccelerator,
as this can cause the automatic
transmission to overheat.
bottom
Making Turns and Braking
Driving on Hills
Handling Crosswinds and Buff eting
Backing Up
Parking
Towing a Trailer
190
06/08/08 14:47:17 31SDR620_195
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
If you have the skills and tools to
perform more complex maintenance
tasks on your vehicle, you may want
to purchase the service manual. See
page for information on how to
obtain a copy, or see your dealer.
This section explains why it is
important to keep your vehicle well
maintained and how to follow basic
maintenance safety precautions.
This section also includes
instructions on how to read the
maintenance minder messages on
the information display, a
maintenance record, and instructions
for simple maintenance tasks you
may want to take care of yourself.
......................Maintenance Safety . 192
....................Maintenance Minder . 193
....................Maintenance Record . 200
..............................Fluid Locations . 202
........................Adding Engine Oil . 203
.......Recommended Engine Oil . 203
..............................Synthetic Oil . 204
................Engine Oil Additives . 204
.........Changing the Oil and Filter . 205
..............................Engine Coolant . 207
....................Windshield Washers . 209
.......................Transmission Fluid . 210
....................................Brake Fluid . 211
....................................Timing Belt . 212
.............................................Lights . 213
................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 219
.....................................Floor Mats . 219
..............................Audio Antenna . 220
..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 220
.................................Wiper Blades . 221
...............................................Tires . 223
.......................................Wheels . 223
..................Inflation Guidelines . 223
.Recommended Tire Pressure . 224
..........................Tire Inspection . 225
.....................Tire Maintenance . 225
.............................Tire Rotation . 226
...Replacing Tires and Wheels . 226
......................Wheels and Tires . 227
..........................Winter Driving . 227
.............................Snow Tires . 227
............................Tire Chains . 228
......Checking the 12 Volt Battery . 229
.............................Vehicle Storage . 230
275
Maintenance
Maintenance
191
06/08/08 14:47:24 31SDR620_196
Main Menu
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
background
All service items not detailed in this
section should be performed by a
certified technician or other qualified
mechanic.
To eliminate potential hazards, read
the instructions before you begin,
and make sure you have the tools
and skills required.
To clean parts, use a commercially
available degreaser or parts
cleaner, not gasoline.
To reduce the possibility of fire or
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,
and flames away from the battery
and all fuel-related parts.
Wear eye protection and
protective clothing when
working near the battery or
when using compressed air.
Be sure
there is adequate ventilation
whenever you operate the
engine.
Let the
engine and exhaust system cool
down before touching any parts.
Do
not run the engine unless
instructed to do so.
Some of the most important safety
precautions are given here. However,
we cannot warn you of every
conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you
can decide whether or not you
should perform a given task.
Make sure your vehicle is parked
on level ground, the parking brake
is set, and the engine is off.
Maintenance Safety
Important Safety Precautions
Carbon Monoxide poison
from engine exhaust.
Burns from hot parts.
Injury from moving parts.
Potential Vehicle Hazards
192
Failure to properly follow
maintenance instructions and
precautions can cause you to
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures
and precautions in this owner’s
manual.
Improperly maintaining this
vehicle, or failing to correct a
problem before driving can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection
and maintenance
recommendations and
schedules in this owner’s
manual.
06/08/08 14:47:35 31SDR620_197
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
background
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Your vehicle displays engine oil life
and maintenance service items on
the information display to show you
when you should have your dealer
perform engine oil replacement and
indicated maintenance service.
Based on the engine operating
conditions and accumulated engine
revolutions, the onboard computer in
your vehicle calculates the remaining
engine oil life and displays it as a
percentage.
To see the current engine oil life,
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, then press and release
the Select/Reset knob repeatedly
until the engine oil life indicator
appears (see page ).
The remaining engine oil life is
shownonthedisplayaccordingto
this table:
67
CONTINUED
Calculated Engine
Oil Life (%)
100 % 91 %
90 % 81 %
80 % 71 %
70 % 61 %
60 % 51 %
50 % 41 %
40 % 31 %
30 % 21 %
20 % 16 %
15 % 11 %
10 % 6 %
5% 1%
0%
Displayed
Engine Oil Life (%)
100 %
90 %
80 %
70 %
60 %
50 %
40 %
30 %
20 %
15 %
10 %
5%
0%
Maintenance Minder
Engine Oil Life Display
Maintenance
193
ENGINE OIL LIFE DISPLAY
06/08/08 14:47:44 31SDR620_198
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
If the remaining engine oil life is 15
to 6 percent, you will see the engine
oil life indicator every time you turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. The maintenance minder
indicator will also come on, and the
maintenance item code(s) for other
scheduled maintenance items
needing service will be displayed
next to the engine oil life indicator.
When the remaining engine oil life is
5 to 1 percent, you will see a
‘‘SERVICE’’ message in the
information display, along with the
same maintenance item code(s),
everytimeyouturntheignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
The maintenance item code or codes
indicate the main and sub items
required at the time of the oil change
(see page ).
You can switch the information
display from the engine oil life
display to the odometer or the trip
meter. Press and release the Select/
Reset knob on the instrument panel.
When the engine oil life is 15 to 1
percent, the maintenance minder
indicator ( ) comes on every
time you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, then it goes out
if you switch the information display.
When you see this message, have
the indicated maintenance
performed by your dealer as soon as
possible.
196
Maintenance Minder
194
MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE
06/08/08 14:47:53 31SDR620_199
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
−
When the remaining engine oil life is
0 percent, the engine oil life indicator
will blink. The display comes on
everytimeyouturntheignition
switch to the ON (II) position. The
maintenance minder indicator
( ) also comes on and remains
on in the instrument panel. When
you see this message, immediately
have the indicated maintenance done
by your dealer.
The maximum total mileage shown
is ‘‘ 9999.’’
If you do not perform the indicated
maintenance, negative mileage is
displayed and begins to blink after
the vehicle has been driven 10 miles
(10 km) or more.
Negative mileage means your
vehicle has passed the maintenance
required point.
Immediately have the indicated
maintenancedonebyyourdealer.
To change the information display
from the engine oil life display to the
odometer or the trip meter, press
and release the Select/Reset knob.
When the engine oil life is 0 percent
or negative mileage, the
maintenance minder indicator
( )remainsonevenifyou
change the information display.
Immediately have the service done,
and make sure to reset the display as
described on the next page.
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance
195
06/08/08 14:48:04 31SDR620_200
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
If maintenance service is done by
someone other than your dealer,
reset the maintenance minder as
follows:
Press the Select/Reset knob until
the engine oil life indicator is
displayed.
Your dealer will reset the display
after completing the required
maintenance service. You will see
‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the information
display the next time you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
All maintenance items displayed in
the information display are in code.
For an explanation of these
maintenance codes, see page .
Press and hold the Select/Reset
knob for about 10 seconds. The
engine oil life and the maintenance
item code(s) will blink.
3.
1.
2.199
Maintenance Main Items and Sub
Items
Resetting the Engine Oil Life
Display
Maintenance Minder
196
MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM (S)
MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM
06/08/08 14:48:15 31SDR620_201
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
If you have the required service
done but do not reset the display, or
reset the display without doing the
service, the system will not show the
proper maintenance intervals. This
canleadtoseriousmechanical
problems because you will no longer
have an accurate record of when
maintenance is needed.
Your authorized Honda dealer
knows your vehicle best and can
provide competent, efficient service.
However, service at a dealer is not
mandatory to keep your warranties
in effect. Maintenance may be done
by any qualified service facility or
person who is skilled in this type of
automotive service. Make sure to
have the service facility or person
reset the display as previously
described. Keep all receipts as proof
of completion, and have the person
who does the work fill out the
maintenance record in this owner’s
manual, or in the Honda service
history booklet. Check your
warranty booklet for more
information.
We recommend the use of Honda
parts and fluids whenever you have
maintenance done. These are
manufactured to the same high-
quality standards as the original
components, so you can be confident
of their performance and durability.
Press the Select/Reset knob for
another 5 seconds. The
maintenance item code(s) will
disappear, and the engine oil life
will reset to ‘‘100.’’
4.
Important Maintenance
Precautions
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance
197
06/08/08 14:48:22 31SDR620_202
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
−
−
−
−
−
−
＃
U.S. Vehicles:
Youshouldcheckthefollowing
items at the specified intervals. If
you are unsure of how to perform
any check, turn to the appropriate
page listed.
Lights Check the operation of
the headlights, parking lights,
taillights, high-mount brake light,
and license plate lights monthly.
See page .
Engine coolant level Check the
radiator reserve tank every time
youfillthefueltank.Seepage .
Engine oil level Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See
page .
Automatic transmission Check
the fluid level monthly. See page
.
Brakes Check the fluid level
monthly. See page .
Tires Check the tire pressure
monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See page
.
According to state and federal
regulations, failure to perform
maintenance on the items marked
with will not void your emissions
warranties. However, all
maintenance services should be
performed in accordance with the
intervals indicated by the
information display.
159
160
210
211
225
213
Maintenance, replacement, or
repair of emissions control
devices and systems may be done
by any automotive repair
establishment or individual using
parts that are ‘‘certified’’ to EPA
standards.
Owner’s Maintenance Checks
Maintenance Minder
198
06/08/08 14:48:34 31SDR620_203
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
＊
＊
＃
＃
−
−
＃
＊
Maintenance Minder
199
Maintenance Main Items
Replace engine oil
Replace engine oil and oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes
Check parking brake adjustment
Inspect these items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system
Fuel lines and connections
Maintenance Sub Items
Rotate tires
Replace air cleaner element
Replace dust and pollen filter
Inspect drive belt
Replace transmission fluid
Replace spark plugs
Replace timing belt and inspect water pump
(V6 engine only)
Inspect valve clearance
Replace engine coolant
:
A
B
Symbol
1
2
3
4
5
Symbol
1
1
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the first column
on page .
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).
If the message ‘‘SERVICE’’ does not appear more than 12 months after the
display is reset, change the engine oil every year.
Independent of the maintenance messages in the information display,
replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 only if they are noisy.
NOTE:
1:
198
If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000
miles (24,000 km).
If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high
concentrations of soot in the air from industry and from
diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000 miles
(24,000 km).
Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds
or trailer towing results in higher transmission and
transfer temperatures. This requires transmission and
transfer fluid changes more frequently than
recommended by the Maintenance Minder. If you
regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have
the transmission and transfer fluid changed at 60,000
miles (100,000 km), then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km).
If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over
110°F, 43°C), or in very low temperatures (under 20°F,
29°C), replace every 60,000 miles (U.S.)/100,000 km
(Canada).
Maintenance Minder
06/08/08 14:48:43 31SDR620_204
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Maintenance Record
200
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
Maintenance
Performed
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
Signature
Date
Maintenance
Performed
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
Signature
Date
Mileage
km
km
km
km
km
km
km
Mileage
km
km
km
km
km
km
km
You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here. When maintenance is performed, record the mileage, circle the coded item(s)
completed, and write in any other non-coded items (such as brake fluid replacement) below the codes. Keep the receipts for all work done on your
vehicle. Maintenance can also be recorded in your Honda service history booklet.
06/08/08 14:48:50 31SDR620_205
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Maintenance Record
Maintenance
201
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
Maintenance
Performed
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
Signature
Date
Maintenance
Performed
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
Signature
Date
Mileage
km
km
km
km
km
km
km
Mileage
km
km
km
km
km
km
km
06/08/08 14:48:57 31SDR620_206
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Fluid Locations
202
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
RADIATOR CAP
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
(Orange loop)
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)
BRAKE FLUID
(Gray cap)
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
ENGINE COOLANT
RESERVOIR
06/08/08 14:49:02 31SDR620_207
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Oil is a major contributor to your
engine’s performance and longevity.
Always use a premium-grade 5W-20
detergent oil displaying the API
Certification Seal. This seal indicates
the oil is energy conserving, and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
Install the engine oil fill cap, and
tighten it securely. Wait a few
minutes, and recheck the oil level.
Do not fill above the upper mark; you
could damage the engine.
Unscrew and remove the engine oil
fill cap on top of the valve cover.
Pour in the oil slowly and carefully so
you do not spill any. Clean up any
spills immediately. Spilled oil could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
CONTINUED
Recommended Engine Oil
Adding Engine Oil
Maintenance
203
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
06/08/08 14:49:09 31SDR620_208
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Honda Motor Oil is the preferred
5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is
highly recommended that you use
Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for
optimum engine protection. Make
sure the API Certification Seal says
‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’
Your vehicle does not require any oil
additives. Additives may adversely
affect the engine or transmission
performance and durability.
The oil viscosity or weight is
provided on the container’s label.
5W-20 oil is formulated for year-
round protection of your vehicle to
improve cold weather starting and
fuel economy.
You may use a synthetic motor oil if
it meets the same requirements
given for a conventional motor oil: it
displays the API certification seal,
and it is the proper weight. You must
follow the oil and filter change
intervals shown on the information
display.
Synthetic Oil
Engine Oil Additives
Adding Engine Oil
204
API CERTIFICATION SEAL
Ambient Temperature
06/08/08 14:49:18 31SDR620_209
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Open the hood, and remove the
engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil
drain bolt and washer from the
bottom of the engine. Drain the oil
into an appropriate container.
Remove the oil filter, and let the
remaining oil drain. A special
wrench (available from your
dealer) is required.
Always change the oil and filter
according to the maintenance
messages shown on the information
display. The oil and filter collect
contaminants that can damage your
engine if they are not removed
regularly.
Changing the oil and filter requires
special tools and access from
underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
should be raised on a service station-
type hydraulic lift for this service.
Unless you have the knowledge and
proper equipment, you should have
this maintenance done by a skilled
mechanic.
Run the engine until it reaches
normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.
Check the oil filter to make sure
its gasket did not stick to the filter
base. A stuck gasket could cause
an oil leak.
3.
2.
1.
4.
CONTINUED
Changing the Oil and Filter
Maintenance
205
WASHEROIL DRAIN BOLT
06/08/08 14:49:27 31SDR620_210
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Install a new oil filter according to
the instructions that come with it.
Put a new washer on the drain bolt,
then reinstall the drain bolt.
Tighten it to:
Make sure to clean off any dirt
and dust on the connecting
surface of a new oil filter.
Refill the engine with the recom-
mended oil.
Engine oil change capacity
(including filter):
Replace the engine oil fill cap.
Start the engine. The oil pressure
indicator should go out within 5
seconds. If it does not, turn off the
engine, and check your work.
Let the engine run for several
minutes, then check the drain bolt
and oil filter for leaks.
Turn off the engine and let it sit
for several minutes, then check
the oil level on the dipstick. If
necessary, add more oil.
6.
7.
8.
5. 9.
10.
Changing the Oil and Filter
206
OIL FILTER
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)
4.5 US qt (4.3
)
Improper disposal of engine oil can be
harmful to the environment. If you
change your own oil, please dispose of
the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
container and take it to a recycling
center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
or dump it on the ground.
06/08/08 14:49:37 31SDR620_211
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not
available, you may use another
major-brand non-silicate coolant as a
temporaryreplacement.Makesureit
is a high-quality coolant
recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda
coolant can result in corrosion,
causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling
system flushed and refilled with
Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.
If the reserve tank is completely
empty, you should also check the
coolant level in the radiator.
If the coolant level in the reserve
tank is at or below the MIN line, add
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line.
Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
Always use Honda Long-life Anti-
freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolant
is pre-mixed with 50 percent
antifreeze and 50 percent water.
Never add straight antifreeze or
plain water.
CONTINUED
Adding Engine Coolant
Engine Coolant
Maintenance
207
RESERVE TANK
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
06/08/08 14:49:47 31SDR620_212
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
Fill it to halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
Do not add any rust inhibitors or
other additives to your vehicle’s
cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
engine components.
The coolant level should be up to
the base of the filler neck. Add
coolant if it is low.
Pourthecoolantslowlyand
carefully so you do not spill any.
Clean up any spill immediately; it
could damage components in the
engine compartment.
Put the radiator cap back on and
tighten it.
Make sure the engine and radiator
are cool.
Relieve any pressure in the cooling
system by turning the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without
pressing down.
Remove the radiator cap by
pushing down and turning
counterclockwise.
4.
1.
2.
3.
5.
6.
Engine Coolant
208
RADIATOR CAP
06/08/08 14:49:56 31SDR620_213
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Check the level in the windshield
washer reservoir at least monthly
during normal use.
When you refill the reservoir, clean
the edges of the windshield wiper
blades with windshield washer fluid
on a clean cloth. This will help to
condition the blade edges.
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
windshield washer fluid. This
increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather.
Check the reservoir’s fluid level by
removing the cap and looking at the
level gauge attached to the cap.
The low washer level
indicator will come on when the level
is low (see page ).65
Canadian model:
Windshield Washers
Maintenance
209
LEVEL GAUGE
Do not use engine antifreeze or a
vinegar/water solution in the
windshield washer reservoir. Antifreeze
can damage your vehicle’s paint, while
a vinegar/water solution can damage
the windshield washer pump. Use only
commercially-available windshield
washer fluid.
06/08/08 14:50:05 31SDR620_214
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Insert the dipstick all the way into
the transmission.
Make sure the rubber cap on the
dipstick fits in the dipstick guide
and that you push the dipstick in
all the way.
Remove the dipstick and check
the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)
from the transmission, and wipe it
with a clean cloth.
The transmission should be drained
and refilled with new fluid according
to the maintenance minder (see page
).
If you are not sure how to add fluid,
contact your dealer.
Check the fluid level with the engine
at normal operating temperature.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Start the engine and let it run until
the radiator fan comes on, then
shut off the engine. For accurate
results, wait about 60 seconds
before going to step 2, but don’t
wait longer than 90 seconds.
3.
4.
1.
2.
193
Transmission Fluid
210
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
DIPSTICK
06/08/08 14:50:15 31SDR620_215
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Check the fluid level in the brake
fluid reservoir monthly.
Replace the brake fluid according to
the maintenance minder (see page
).
To thoroughly flush the transmission,
the technician should drain and refill
it with Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic
Transmission Fluid), then drive the
vehicle for a short distance. Do this
three times. Then drain and refill the
transmission a final time.
Insert the dipstick all the way back
into the transmission.
If the level is below the lower
mark, add fluid into the dipstick
hole to bring it to the level
between the upper and lower
marks.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully
so you do not spill any. Clean up
any spill immediately; it could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
Always use Honda ATF-Z1
(automatic transmission fluid). If it’s
not available, you may use a
DEXRON
III automatic
transmission fluid as a temporary
replacement. However, continued
use can affect the shift quality. Have
the transmission flushed and refilled
with Honda ATF-Z1 as soon as it is
convenient.
6.
5.
193
CONTINUED
Transmission Fluid, Brake Fluid
Brake Fluid
Maintenance
211
06/08/08 14:50:24 31SDR620_216
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
−−
The timing belt should be replaced
according to the maintenance
minder (see page ).
Replace the timing belt every 60,000
miles (U.S.) or every 100,000 km
(Canada) if you regularly drive your
vehicleinanyofthefollowing
conditions:
In very high temperatures
(over 110°F, 43°C).
In very low temperatures
(under 20°F, 29°C).
Frequently tow a trailer.
The fluid level should be between
theMINandMAXmarksontheside
of the reservoir. If the level is at or
below the MIN mark, your brake
system needs attention. Have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
Always use Honda Heavy Duty
Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
available, you should use only DOT 3
or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
container, as a temporary
replacement.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can
cause corrosion and decrease the life
of the system. Have the brake
system flushed and refilled with
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 as soon as possible.
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not
compatible with your vehicle’s
braking system and can cause
extensive damage.
193
Timing Belt
Brake Fluid, Timing Belt
212
MAX
MIN
06/08/08 14:50:34 31SDR620_217
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Your vehicle has two bulbs on each
side, four in total. Make sure you are
replacing the bulb that is burned out.
Your vehicle uses halogen headlight
bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
it by its plastic case and protect the
glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass,
clean it with denatured alcohol and a
clean cloth.
Theheadlightswereproperlyaimed
when your vehicle was new. If you
regularly carry heavy items in the
trunk or pull a trailer, readjustment
may be required. Adjustments
should be performed by your dealer
or other qualified mechanic.
Headlight Aiming Replacing a Headlight Bulb
Lights
Maintenance
213
Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot
when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch
on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter.
06/08/08 14:50:40 31SDR620_218
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by squeezing the
connector to unlock the tab, then
slide the connector off the bulb.
Push the electrical connector onto
the bulb.
Turn on the headlights to test the
new bulb.
Open the hood. To change a bulb
on the driver’s side, undo the two
fasteners and remove the air
intake cover.
Reinstall the air intake cover.
Reinstall the two fasteners and
secure them by pushing on the
heads until they lock.
Remove the bulb by turning it
about one-quarter turn
counterclockwise.
Install the new bulb, and turn it
one-quarter turn clockwise to lock
it in place.
1. 3.
2.
4.
5.
6.
7.
High Beam Headlight
Lights
214
AIR INTAKE
COVER
FASTENERS
TAB
BULB
06/08/08 14:50:50 31SDR620_219
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
To change the passenger’s side
bulb, start the engine, turn the
steering wheel all the way to the
left, and turn off the engine. To
change the driver’s side bulb, turn
the steering wheel to the right.
Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to
remove the two holding clips from
the inner fender.
Pull the inner fender cover away
from the fender and bumper.
Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by squeezing the
connector to unlock the tab, then
slide the connector off the bulb.
Install the new bulb, and turn it
one-quarter turn clockwise to lock
it in place.
Push the electrical connector onto
the bulb.
Turn on the headlights to test the
new bulb.
Put the inner fender cover in place.
Install the two holding clips. Lock
each one in place by pushing on
the center.
Remove the bulb by turning it
about one-quarter turn
counterclockwise.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Low Beam Headlight
Lights
Maintenance
215
HOLDING CLIPS
BULB
06/08/08 14:51:01 31SDR620_220
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
To change the passenger’s side
bulb, start the engine, turn the
steering wheel all the way to the
left, and turn off the engine. To
change the driver’s side bulb, turn
the steering wheel to the right.
Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to
remove the two holding clips from
the inner fender.
To remove the burned out bulb,
push it in and turn it
counterclockwise until it unlocks.
Install the new bulb and turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
Insert the socket into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
Test the new bulb to make sure it
works.
Put the inner fender cover in place.
Install and lock each holding clip
bypushingonthecenter.
Pull the inner fender cover away
from the fender and bumper.
Remove the socket from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
1.
3.
2.
4.
8.
7.
6.
9.
5.Replacing the Front Side Marker/
Turn Signal and Parking Light
Bulb
Lights
216
HOLDING CLIPS
BULB
06/08/08 14:51:13 31SDR620_221
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Open the trunk.
Remove the holding clips from the
lining by using a flat-tipped
screwdriver.
Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise,
and pull the bulb straight out of its
socket.
Push a new bulb straight into the
socket until it bottoms, and
reinstall the socket into the light
assembly by turning it clockwise
until it locks.
Test the new bulb to make sure it
works.
Set the lining back.
2.
1.
4.
3.
5.
6.
Replacing Rear Turn Signal Light
Bulbs
Lights
Maintenance
217
HOLDING CLIPS
BULB
SOCKET
06/08/08 14:51:23 31SDR620_222
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Open the trunk. Carefully bend back the corner of
the trunk lid trim to expose the
bulbs.
Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise,
and pull the bulb straight out of its
socket.
Install a new bulb into the socket,
and reinstall the socket into the
light assembly.
Test the light.
Push the trunk lid trim back into
position.
Press the trim clips back into their
holes.
Remove the trim clips from the
right or left corner of the trunk lid
trim by carefully prying them
using a small, flat-tip screwdriver
wrapped with tape.
1. 3.
2.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Replacing Back-up Light Bulbs
Lights
218
TRIM CLIPS
BULB
SOCKET
SOCKET
BULB
06/08/08 14:51:35 31SDR620_223
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat
belt anchors can cause the belts to
retract slowly. Wipe the insides of
the loops with a clean cloth
dampened in mild soap and warm
water or isopropyl alcohol.
If you use non-Honda floor mats,
make sure they fit properly and that
theycanbeusedwiththefloormat
anchors. Do not put additional floor
mats on top of the anchored mats.
If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft
brush with a mixture of mild soap
and warm water to clean them. Do
not use bleach, dye, or cleaning
solvents. Let the belts air-dry before
you use the vehicle.
The floor mats that came with your
vehicle hook over floor mat anchors.
This keeps the floor mats from
sliding forward or backward and
possibly interfering with the pedals
or making the front passenger’s
weight sensors ineffective.
If you remove a floor mat, make sure
tore-anchoritwhenyouputitback
in your vehicle.
Cleaning the Seat Belts Floor Mats
Cleaning the Seat Belts, Floor Mats
Maintenance
219
LOOP
06/08/08 14:51:44 31SDR620_224
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
This filter removes the dust and
pollenthatisbroughtinfromthe
outside through the heating and
cooling system.
Have your dealer replace the filter
when this service is indicated by a
maintenance message on the
information display. It should be
replaced every 15,000 miles (24,000
km) if you drive primarily in urban
areas that have high concentrations
of soot in the air, or if the flow from
the heating and cooling system
becomeslessthanusual.
Audio Antenna Dust and Pollen Filter
Audio Antenna, Dust and Pollen Filter
220
Your vehicle is equipped with an
antenna at the rear of the roof. Before
using a ‘‘drive-through’’ car wash,
remove the antenna by unscrewing it by
hand. This prevents the antenna from
being damaged by the car wash brushes.
06/08/08 14:51:50 31SDR620_225
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Check the condition of the wiper
blades at least every six months.
Look for signs of cracking in the
rubber, or areas that are getting
hard. Replace the blades if you find
these signs, or if they leave streaks
and unwiped areas when used.
To replace a wiper blade:
Raise the wiper arm off the
windshield. Raise the driver’s side
first, then the passenger’s side.
Disconnect the blade assembly
fromthewiperarmbypushingin
the lock tab. Hold the lock tab in
while you push the blade assembly
toward the base of the arm.
2.
1.
CONTINUED
Wiper Blades
Maintenance
221
LOCK TAB
WIPER ARMS
Do not open the hood when the wiper
arms are raised, or you will damage the
hood and wiper arms.
06/08/08 14:51:59 31SDR620_226
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Remove the blade from its holder
by grasping the tabbed end of the
blade. Pull firmly until the tabs
come out of the holder.
Examine the new wiper blades. If
they have no plastic or metal
reinforcement along the back
edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.
Slide the new wiper blade into the
holder until the tabs lock.
Slide the wiper blade assembly
onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
Lower the wiper arm down against
the windshield, the passenger’s
side first, then the driver’s side.
3. 4.
5.
6.
7.
Wiper Blades
222
BLADE BLADE
REINFORCEMENT
06/08/08 14:52:06 31SDR620_227
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best combination of
handling, tread life, and riding
comfort.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel
economy, and are more likely to
fail from being overheated.
Overinflated tires can make your
vehicleridemoreharshly,are
more prone to damage from road
hazards, and wear unevenly.
We recommend that you visually
check your tires every day. If you
think a tire might be low, check it
immediately with a tire gauge.
To safely operate your vehicle, your
tires must be the proper type and
size, in good condition with adequate
tread, and correctly inflated.
The following pages give more
detailed information on how to take
care of your tires and what to do
when they need to be replaced.
Clean the wheels as you would the
rest of the exterior. Wash them with
thesamesolution,andrinsethem
thoroughly.
Aluminum alloy wheels have a
protective clear-coat that keeps the
aluminum from corroding and
tarnishing. Cleaning the wheels with
harsh chemicals (including some
commercial wheel cleaners) or a stiff
brush can damage the clear-coat. To
clean the wheels, use a mild
detergent and a soft brush or sponge.
CONTINUED
Tires
Inflation GuidelinesWheels
Maintenance
223
Using tires that are excessively
worn or improperly inflated can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding tire
inflation and maintenance.
06/08/08 14:52:17 31SDR620_228
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
While tubeless tires have some
ability to self-seal if they are
punctured, you should look closely
for punctures if a tire starts losing
pressure.
If you check air pressures when the
tires are hot (driven for several
miles), you will see readings 4 to 6
psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4 kgf/cm )
higher than the cold readings. This
is normal. Do not let air out to match
the recommended cold air pressure.
The tire will be underinflated.
Youshouldgetyourowntire
pressure gauge and use it whenever
you check your tire pressures. This
will make it easier for you to tell if a
pressure loss is due to a tire problem
and not due to a variation between
gauges.
Use a gauge to measure the air
pressure in each tire at least once a
month. Even tires that are in good
condition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to
20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per
month. Remember to check the
sparetireatthesametime.
Check the air pressures when the
tires are cold. This means the
vehicle has been parked for at least 3
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6
km). Add or release air, if needed, to
match the recommended cold tire
pressures on the next page.
The following chart shows the
recommended cold tire pressures for
most normal and high-speed driving
conditions.
Thecompactsparetirepressureis:
For convenience, the recommended
tire sizes and cold tire pressures are
on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
For additional information about
your tires, see page .261
Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure
for Normal Driving
Front/Rear:
Recommended Tire Pressure
Tires
224
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm
)
P215/60R16 94V 32 psi (220 kPa ,
2.2 kgf/cm
)
06/08/08 14:52:29 31SDR620_229
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
＋Wheel:
Tire:
See page for DOT tire quality
grading information, and page
for tire size information.
Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘All
Season’’ on the sidewall have an all-
weather tread design suitable for
most winter driving conditions.
For the best performance in snowy
or icy conditions, you should install
snow tires or tire chains. They may
be required by local laws under
certain conditions.
If you mount snow tires on your
vehicle, make sure they are radial
tires of the same size and load range
as the original tires. Mount snow
tires on all four wheels. The traction
provided by snow tires on dry roads
maybelowerthanyouroriginaltires.
Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
262
261
Wheels and Tires Winter Driving
Snow Tires
Tires
Maintenance
227
16x61/2JJ
P215/60R16 94V
06/08/08 14:53:00 31SDR620_232
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
When installing cables, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions, and
mount them as tight as you can.
Make sure they are not contacting
the brake lines or suspension. Drive
slowly with them installed. If you
hear them coming into contact with
the body or chassis, stop and
investigate. Remove them as soon as
you begin driving on cleared roads.
Because your vehicle has limited tire
clearance, Honda strongly
recommends using the chains listed
below, made by Security Chain
Company (SCC).
Mount tire chains on your tires when
required by driving conditions or
local laws. Install them only on the
front tires.
Cable-types: SCC Radial Chain
CH2311T or SCC SC Cable SC1030
Tire Chains
Tires
228
Using the wrong chains, or not
properly installing chains, can
damage the brake lines and
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously injured or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding the
selection and use of tire chains.
Traction devices that are the wrong
size or improperly installed can
damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop
driving if they are hitting any part of
the vehicle.
06/08/08 14:53:07 31SDR620_233
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
−
Check the terminals for corrosion (a
white or yellowish powder). To
remove it, cover the terminals with a
solution of baking soda and water. It
will bubble up and turn brown. When
this stops, wash it off with plain
water. Dry off the battery with a
cloth or paper towel. Coat the
terminals with grease to help prevent
future corrosion.
Check the condition of the 12 volt
battery monthly by looking at the
test indicator window. The label on
the battery explains the test
indicator’s colors.
If additional battery maintenance is
needed, see your dealer or a
qualified mechanic.
Battery posts,
terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds.
If you need to connect the battery to
a charger, disconnect both cables to
prevent damaging your vehicle’s
electrical system. Always disconnect
the negative ( ) cable first, and
reconnect it last.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected, or goes dead, the time
setting is lost. To reset the time, see
page .
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, the audio
system will disable itself. The next
timeyouturnontheradioyouwill
see ‘‘CODE’’ in the frequency display.
Use the preset bars to enter the code
(see page ).
If your vehicle’s 12 volt battery is
disconnected or goes dead, the IMA
battery level gauge reading will not
be correct the next time you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. It will show less than the
actual level temporarily. It will show
the correct level after you drive for
at least 30 minutes.
145
144
CONTINUED
Checking the 12 Volt Battery
WARNING:
Wash your hands after handling.
Maintenance
229
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW
06/08/08 14:53:17 31SDR620_234
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
If you need to park your vehicle for
an extended period (more than 1
month), there are several things you
should do to prepare it for storage.
Proper preparation helps prevent
deterioration and makes it easier to
get your vehicle back on the road. If
possible, store your vehicle indoors.
Fill the fuel tank.
Change the engine oil and filter.
Wash and dry the exterior
completely.
Cleantheinterior.Makesurethe
carpeting, floor mats, etc., are
completely dry.
Vehicle Storage
Checking the 12 Volt Battery, Vehicle Storage
230
The battery gives off explosive
hydrogen gas during normal
operation.
A spark or flame can cause the
battery to explode with enough
force to kill or seriously hurt you.
Wear protective clothing and a
face shield, or have a skilled
technician do the battery
maintenance.
06/08/08 14:53:24 31SDR620_235
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Support the front wiper blade
arms with a folded towel or rag so
they do not touch the windshield.
To minimize sticking, apply a
silicone spray lubricant to all door
and trunk seals. Also, apply a
vehiclebodywaxtothepainted
surfaces that mate with the door
and trunk seals.
Cover the vehicle with a
‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made
from a porous material such as
cotton. Non-porous materials, such
as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
which can damage the paint.
Leave the parking brake off. Put
the transmission in Park.
Block the rear wheels.
If the vehicle is to be stored for a
longer period, it should be
supported on jackstands so the
tires are off the ground.
Leave one window open slightly (if
the vehicle is being stored
indoors).
Reconnect the 12 volt battery and
drive your vehicle every month for
about 30 minutes. This will keep
the IMA battery charged and in
good condition.
Disconnect the 12 volt battery.
Vehicle Storage
Maintenance
231
If this vehicle is unused for over one
month, the service life of the 144V
Nickel-Metal Hydride battery will be
reduced and the battery may be
permanently damaged.
06/08/08 14:53:34 31SDR620_236
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
▲
▼
background
This section covers the more
common problems that motorists
experience with their vehicles. It
gives you information about how to
safely evaluate the problem and what
to do to correct it. If the problem has
stranded you on the side of the road,
you may be able to get going again.
If not, you will also find instructions
on getting your vehicle towed.
......................Compact Spare Tire . 234
....................Changing a Flat Tire . 235
.............If the Engine Won’t Start . 239
Nothing Happens or the
Starter Motor Operates
............................Very Slowly . 239
The Starter Operates
................................Normally . 240
................................Jump Starting . 241
..............If the Engine Overheats . 243
.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 245
..........Charging System Indicator . 245
.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 246
.......................Readiness Codes . 246
...............Brake System Indicator . 247
..................Closing the Moonroof . 248
..............................................Fuses . 249
..............................Fuse Locations . 253
......................Emergency Towing . 255
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Taking Care of the Unexpected
233
06/08/08 14:53:40 31SDR620_238
Main Menu
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
background
Check the inflation pressure of the
compact spare tire every time you
check the other tires. It should be
inflated to:
Follow these precautions:
Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
This tire gives a harsher ride and
less traction on some road
surfaces. Use greater caution
while driving.
Do not mount snow chains on the
compact spare tire.
Do not use the compact spare tire
if you are towing a trailer.
Replace the tire when you can see
the tread wear indicator bars. The
replacement should be the same size
and design tire, mounted on the
samewheel.Thesparetireisnot
designed to be mounted on a regular
wheel, and the spare wheel is not
designed for mounting a regular tire.
Use the compact spare tire as a
temporary replacement only. Get
your regular tire repaired or replaced,
and put it back on your vehicle as
soon as you can.
Do not use your compact spare
tire on another vehicle unless it is
thesamemakeandmodel.
Turn off the VSA system (see
pages and ). Driving with
thecompactsparetiremay
activate the VSA.
183 184
Compact Spare Tire
234
INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm
)
06/08/08 14:53:51 31SDR620_239
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
background
Unscrew the wing bolt and take
the spare tire out of its well.
Take the tool tray out of the trunk,
and take the tools out of the tool
tray.
Park the vehicle on firm, level, and
non-slippery ground. Put the
transmission in Park. Apply the
parking brake.
If you are towing a trailer, unhitch
the trailer.
Turn on the hazard warning lights,
and turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Have all
passengers get out of the vehicle
while you change the tire.
The tools are in the trunk. Open
the trunk and raise the trunk floor
by lifting up on the back edge.
If you have a flat tire while driving,
stop in a safe place to change it.
Drive slowly along the shoulder until
you get to an exit or an area to stop
that is far away from the traffic lanes.
5.
4.3.
2.
1.
CONTINUED
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
235
TOOL TRAY
The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack, seriously injuring
anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for
changing a tire exactly, and
never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the
jack.
06/08/08 14:54:01 31SDR620_240
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Use the extension and the wheel
nut wrench as shown to raise the
vehicle until the flat tire is off the
ground.
Remove the wheel nuts, then
remove the flat tire. Handle the
wheel nuts carefully; they may be
hot from driving. Place the flat tire
on the ground with the outside
surface facing up.
Place the jack under the jacking
point nearest the tire you need to
change. Turn the end bracket
clockwise until the top of the jack
contacts the jacking point. Make
sure the jacking point tab is
restinginthejacknotch.
Loosen the wheel nuts 1/2 of a
turn with the wheel wrench.
8.
9.
7.6.
Changing a Flat Tire
236
EXTENSION
WHEEL WRENCHJACKING POINT
WHEEL NUT
WHEEL NUT WRENCH
06/08/08 14:54:09 31SDR620_241
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
CONTINUED
Tighten the wheel nuts securely in
the same crisscross pattern. Have
the wheel nut torque checked at
the nearest automotive service
facility.
Tighten the wheel nuts to:
Put on the spare tire. Put the
wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel nut wrench
until the wheel is firmly against
the hub. Do not try to tighten the
wheel nuts fully.
Lower the vehicle to the ground,
and remove the jack.
Before mounting the spare tire,
wipeanydirtoffthemounting
surface of the wheel and hub with
a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
carefully;itmaybehotfrom
driving.
13.
11.
12.
10.
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
237
BRAKE HUB
80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)
06/08/08 14:54:18 31SDR620_242
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Remove the center cap before
storing the flat tire in the trunk
well.
Place the flat tire face down in the
spare tire well.
Remove the spacer cone from the
wing bolt, turn it over, and put it
back on the bolt.
Securetheflattirebyscrewing
the wing bolt back into its hole.
Store the jack and tools in the tool
tray, and place the tool tray back
in the trunk.
14. 15.
16.
17.
18.
Changing a Flat Tire
238
WING BOLT
SPACER CONE
CENTER CAP
06/08/08 14:54:26 31SDR620_243
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Diagnosing why the engine won’t
start falls into two areas, depending
on what you hear when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)
position:
When you turn the ignition switch to
the START (III) position, you do not
hear the normal noise of the engine
trying to start. You may hear a
clicking sound, a series of clicks, or
nothing at all.
Store the center cap in the trunk.
Make sure it does not get
scratched or damaged.
Lower the trunk floor, then close
the trunk lid.
You can hear the starter motor
operating normally, or the starter
motor sounds like it is spinning
faster than normal, but the engine
does not start up and run.
You hear nothing, or almost
nothing. The engine’s starter
motor does not operate at all, or
operates very slowly.
Check these things:
Check the transmission interlock.
The transmission must be in Park
orneutralorthestarterwillnot
operate.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. Turn on the
headlights, and check their
brightness. If the headlights are
very dim or do not come on at all,
the battery is discharged. See
on page .
19.
241
CONTINUED
If the Engine Won’t Start Nothing Happens or the Starter
Motor Operates Very Slowly
Jump Starting
Changing a Flat Tire, If the Engine Won’t Start
Taking Care of the Unexpected
239
Loose items can fly around the
interior in a crash and could
seriously injure the occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools
securely before driving.
06/08/08 14:54:38 31SDR620_244
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Turn the ignition switch to the
START (III) position. If the
headlights do not dim, check the
condition of the fuses. If the fuses
areOK,thereisprobably
something wrong with the
electrical circuit for the ignition
switch or starter motor. You will
need a qualified technician to
determine the problem. See
on page .
In this case, the starter motor’s
speed sounds normal, or even faster
than normal, when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)
position, but the engine does not run.
Are you using the proper starting
procedure? Refer to
on page .
Are you using a properly coded
key? An improperly coded key will
cause the immobilizer system
indicator in the instrument panel
to blink rapidly (see page ).
Do you have fuel? Check the fuel
gauge; the low fuel indicator may
not be working.
There may be an electrical
problem, such as no power to the
fuel pump. Check all the fuses
(see page ).
If the headlights dim noticeably or
go out when you try to start the
engine, either the battery is dis-
charged or the connections are
corroded. Check the condition of
the battery connections (see page
). You can then try jump
starting the vehicle from a booster
battery (see page ).
Ifyoufindnothingwrong,youwill
need a qualified technician to find
the problem. See
on page .
255
229
241
171
82
249
255
Emergency Towing
The Starter Operates Normally
Starting the
Engine
Emergency
Towing
IftheEngineWon’tStart
240
06/08/08 14:54:47 31SDR620_245
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
＋
＋
Although this seems like a simple
procedure, you should take several
precautions. Open the hood, and check the
physical condition of the battery.
In very cold weather, check the
condition of the electrolyte. If it
seems slushy or frozen, do not try
jump starting until it thaws.
You cannot start your vehicle by
pushing or pulling it.
The numbers in the illustration show
the order to connect the jumper
cable.
Put the transmission in neutral or
Park, and set the parking brake.
Turn off all the electrical acces-
sories: heater, A/C, climate
control, stereo system, lights, etc.
Connect one jumper cable to the
positive ( ) terminal on your
battery. Connect the other end to
the positive ( ) terminal on the
booster battery.
1.
2.
3.
CONTINUED
Jump Starting
To Jump Start Your Vehicle:
Taking Care of the Unexpected
241
BOOSTER
BATTERY
A battery can explode if you do
not follow the correct procedure,
seriously injuring anyone
nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames,
and smoking materials away
from the battery.
If a battery sits in extreme cold, the
electrolyte inside can freeze.
Attempting to jump start with a frozen
battery can cause it to rupture.
06/08/08 14:54:59 31SDR620_246
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
−
Once your vehicle is running,
disconnect the negative cable from
your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
positive cable from your vehicle,
then from the booster battery.
Keep the ends of the jumper
cables away from each other and
any metal on the vehicle until
everything is disconnected.
Otherwise, you may cause an
electrical short.
If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
Start the vehicle. If the starter
motor still operates slowly, check
that the jumper cables have good
metal-to-metal contact.
Connect the second jumper cable
to the negative ( ) terminal on
the booster battery. Connect the
other end to the grounding strap
as shown. Do not connect this
jumper cable to any other part of
the engine.
7.
6.
5.
4.
Jump Starting
242
06/08/08 14:55:09 31SDR620_247
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
If you see steam and/or spray
coming from under the hood, turn
off the engine. Wait until you see
no more signs of steam or spray,
then open the hood.
If you do not see steam or spray,
leave the engine running, and
watch the temperature gauge. If
the high heat is due to overloading,
the engine should start to cool
down almost immediately. If it
does, wait until the temperature
gauge comes down to the midpoint,
then continue driving.
If the temperature gauge stays at
the red mark, turn off the engine.
Look for any obvious coolant leaks,
such as a split radiator hose.
Everything is still extremely hot,
so use caution. If you find a leak, it
must be repaired before you
continue driving (see
on page ).
The pointer of the vehicle’s
temperature gauge should stay in
the midrange. If it climbs to the red
mark, you should determine the
reason (hot day, driving up a steep
hill, etc.).
If your vehicle overheats, you should
take immediate action. The only
indicationmaybethetemperature
gauge climbing to or above the red
mark. Or you may see steam or
spray coming from under the hood.
Safely pull to the side of the road.
Put the transmission in neutral or
Park, and set the parking brake.
Turn off all the accessories, and
turn on the hazard warning lights.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
255
CONTINUED
Emergency
Towing
IftheEngineOverheats
Taking Care of the Unexpected
243
Steam and spray from an
overheated engine can
seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam
is coming out.
Driving with the temperature gauge
pointer at the red mark can cause
serious damage to the engine.
06/08/08 14:55:19 31SDR620_248
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Using gloves or a large heavy
cloth, turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without pushing
down, to the first stop. After the
pressure releases, push down on
the cap, and turn it until it comes
off.
Put the radiator cap back on
tightly. Run the engine, and check
the temperature gauge. If it goes
back to the red mark, the engine
needs repair (see
on page ).
If the temperature stays normal,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. If it has
gone down, add coolant to the
MAX mark. Put the cap back on
tightly.
If you do not find an obvious leak,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Add coolant
if the level is below the MIN mark.
If there was no coolant in the
reserve tank, you may need to add
coolant to the radiator. Let the
engine cool down until the pointer
reaches the middle of the tempera-
ture gauge, or lower, before check-
ing the radiator.
Start the engine, and set the
temperature to maximum heat
(climate control to AUTO at
‘‘ ’’). Add coolant to the
radiator up to the base of the filler
neck. If you do not have the
proper coolant mixture available,
you can add plain water.
Remember to have the cooling
system drained and refilled with
the proper mixture as soon as you
can.
7.
6. 8.
9.
10.
11.
255
Emergency
Towing
IftheEngineOverheats
244
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
06/08/08 14:55:29 31SDR620_249
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Let the vehicle sit for a minute.
Open the hood, and check the oil
level (see page ). An engine
very low on oil can lose pressure
during cornering and other driving
maneuvers.
If necessary, add oil to bring the
level back to the full mark on the
dipstick (see page ).
If the charging system
indicator comes on brightly
when the engine is running, the
battery is not being charged.
Immediately turn off all electrical
accessories. Try not to use other
electrically operated controls such as
the power windows. Keep the engine
running; starting the engine will
discharge the battery rapidly.
Go to a service station or garage
where you can get technical
assistance.
Safely pull off the road, and shut
off the engine. Turn on the hazard
warning lights.
This indicator should never
come on when the engine is
running. If it starts flashing or stays
on, the oil pressure has dropped very
low or lost pressure. Serious engine
damage is possible, and you should
take immediate action.
Start the engine, and watch the oil
pressure indicator. If it does not go
out within 10 seconds, turn off the
engine. There is a mechanical
problem that needs to be repaired
before you can continue driving
(see on page
).
1.
2.
4.
3.
159
203
255
Low Oil Pressure Indicator Charging System Indicator
Emergency Towing
Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator
Taking Care of the Unexpected
245
Running the engine with low oil
pressure can cause serious mechanical
damage almost immediately. Turn off
the engine as soon as you can safely get
the vehicle stopped.
06/08/08 14:55:39 31SDR620_250
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
If you have recently refueled your
vehicle, the indicator coming on
could be due to a loose or missing
fuel fill cap. You will also see a
‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message on
the information display. Tighten the
cap until it clicks at least once.
Tightening the cap will not turn the
indicator off immediately; it can take
several days of normal driving.
If the indicator comes on repeatedly,
even though it may go off as you
continue driving, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer as soon as
possible.
If this indicator comes on
while driving, it means one
of the engine’s emissions control
systems may have a problem. Even
though you may feel no difference in
your vehicle’s performance, it can
reduce your fuel economy and cause
increased emissions. Continued
operation may cause serious damage.
The malfunction indicator lamp may
also come on with the ‘‘D’’ indicator.
Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that are part of the on-board
diagnostics for the emissions
systems. In some states, part of the
emissions testing is to make sure
these codes are set. If they are not
set, the test cannot be completed.
If the battery in your vehicle has
been disconnected or gone dead,
these codes are erased. It can take
several days of driving under various
conditions to set the codes again.
To check if they are set, turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, without starting the engine.
The malfunction indicator lamp will
come on for 20 seconds. If it then
goes off, the readiness codes are set.
If it blinks five times, the readiness
codes are not set. If possible, do not
take your vehicle for a state
emissions test until the readiness
codes are set. Refer to
for more
information (see page ).268Readiness Codes
State
Emissions Testing
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
246
If you keep driving with the
malfunction indicator lamp on, you can
damage your vehicle’s emissions
controls and engine. Those repairs may
not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranties.
06/08/08 14:55:48 31SDR620_251
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
However, if the brake pedal does not
feel normal, you should take
immediate action. A problem in one
part of the system’s dual circuit
design will still give you braking at
two wheels. You will feel the brake
pedal go down much farther before
the vehicle begins to slow down, and
you will have to press harder on the
pedal.
If you must drive the vehicle a short
distance in this condition, drive
slowly and carefully.
Slow down by shifting to a lower
gear, and pull to the side of the road
when it is safe. Because of the long
distance needed to stop, it is
hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
should have it towed and repaired as
soon as possible (see
on page ).
The brake system indicator normally
comes on when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position, and as
a reminder to check the parking
brake. It will stay on if you do not
fully release the parking brake.
If the brake system indicator comes
on while driving, the brake fluid level
is probably low. Press lightly on the
brake pedal to see if it feels normal.
If it does, check the brake fluid level
thenexttimeyoustopataservice
station (see page ).
If the ABS indicator comes on with
the brake system indicator, have
your vehicle inspected by your
dealer immediately.
If the fluid level is low, take your
vehicle to a dealer, and have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
211
255
Emergency
Towing
Brake System Indicator
Taking Care of the Unexpected
247
Canada
U.S.
06/08/08 14:55:56 31SDR620_252
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Use a screwdriver or coin to
remove the round plug in the
center of the headliner.
Insert the moonroof wrench into
the socket behind this plug. Turn
the wrench until the moonroof is
fully closed.
Remove the wrench. Reinstall the
round plug.
If you need to close the moonroof
manually, it means the moonroof
opening/closing function is
developing a problem. Have your
vehicle checked by your dealer.
If the electric motor will not close
the moonroof, do the following:
Check the fuse for the moonroof
motor (see page ). If the fuse
is blown, replace it with one of the
same or lower rating.
Try closing the moonroof. If the
new fuse blows immediately or the
moonroof motor still does not
operate, you can close the
moonroof manually.
Get the moonroof wrench out of
the tool kit in the trunk.
5.
6.
4.
3.
1.
2.
254
Closing the Moonroof
248
ROUND PLUG
SOCKET
06/08/08 14:56:06 31SDR620_253
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
−
The interior fuse box is on the
driver’s lower left side. To remove
the fuse box lid, pull it toward you
and take it out of its hinges.
The vehicle’s fuses are located in
four fuse boxes.
There are three under-hood fuse
boxes. The primary fuse box and one
of the secondary fuse boxes are
located in the back of the engine
compartment on the left side.
Another secondary fuse box is
located in the front of the engine
compartmentontherightside.To
open them, push the tabs as shown.
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
249
INTERIOR UNDER-HOOD
TAB
TAB
UNDER HOOD
TAB
06/08/08 14:56:15 31SDR620_254
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Check each of the large fuses in
the under-hood fuse box by
looking at the wire inside.
Removing these fuses requires a
Phillips-head screwdriver.
If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, the first thing
youshouldcheckforisablownfuse.
Determine from the chart on pages
and , or the diagram on the
fuse box lid, which fuse or fuses
control that component. Check those
fuses first, but check all the fuses
before deciding that a blown fuse is
not the cause. Replace any blown
fuses and check if the device works.
Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Make sure the
headlights and all other
accessories are off.
Remove the cover from the fuse
box.
3.1.
2.
253 254
Fuses
Checking and Replacing Fuses
250
BLOWN
BLOWN
06/08/08 14:56:23 31SDR620_255
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Look for a burned wire inside the
fuse. If it is burned out, replace it
withoneofthesparefusesofthe
same rating or lower.
If you cannot drive the vehicle
without fixing the problem, and you
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse
of the same rating or a lower rating
from one of the other circuits. Make
sureyoucandowithoutthatcircuit
temporarily (such as the accessory
power socket or radio).
Check the smaller fuses in the
under-hood fuse boxes and all the
fuses in the interior fuse box by
pulling out each one with the fuse
puller provided in the primary
under-hood fuse box.
4. 5.
CONTINUED
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
251
FUSE PULLER
BLOWN
06/08/08 14:56:31 31SDR620_256
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
If the replacement fuse of the
same rating blows in a short time,
there is probably a serious
electrical problem with your
vehicle. Leave the blown fuse in
that circuit, and have your vehicle
checked by a qualified technician.
If the radio fuse is removed, the
audio system will disable itself. The
nexttimeyouturnontheradioyou
will see ‘‘CODE’’ in the frequency
display. Use the preset bars to enter
thecode(seepage ).
If you replace the blown fuse with a
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it
might blow out again. This does not
indicate anything wrong. Replace the
fuse with one of the correct rating as
soon as you can.
6.
144
Fuses
252
Replacing a fuse with one that has a
higher rating greatly increases the
chances of damaging the electrical
system. If you do not have a
replacement fuse with the proper rating
for the circuit, install one with a lower
rating.
06/08/08 14:56:37 31SDR620_257
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
−
＋
No. No.Amps. Circuits Protected
No.
Amps.
Amps. Circuits Protected
Circuits Protected
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
10 A
30 A
10 A
15 A
10 A
Left Headlight Low
Rear Defroster Coil
Left Headlight Hi
Small Light
Right Headlight Hi
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
10 A
7.5 A
15 A
20 A
30 A
7.5 A
15 A
40 A
40 A
15 A
30 A
40 A
40 A
40 A
40 A
120 A
70 A
50 A
50 A
Cooling Fan
MG. Clutch
Horn, Stop
Rear Defroster
Back Up, ACC
Hazard
VSA Motor
VSA
Option
Option
Heater Motor
Battery
EPS
BIG1Main
Power Window Main
Right Headlight Low
Back Up
FI ECU
Condenser Fan
Not Used
Fuse Locations
Taking Care of the Unexpected
253
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
06/08/08 14:56:46 31SDR620_258
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
−
−
−
−
−
No.
No. Amps.Amps.No. Circuits Protected
Amps. Circuits Protected
Circuits Protected
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
7.5 A
30 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
15 A
15 A
10 A
15 A
10 A
7.5 A
10 A
20 A
20 A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
OPDS
Wiper
Not Used
Not Used
Driver’s Power Seat (Slide)
Heated Seat
Driver’s Power Seat
(Recline)
15 A
15 A
10 A
7.5 A
10 A
7.5 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
20 A
7.5 A
15 A
10 A
Not Used
ACG
Fuel Pump
Washer
Meter
SRS
IGP
Power Window (Left Rear)
Power Window (Right Rear)
Power Window (Passenger)
Power Window (Driver)
Moonroof
Hybrid A/C
A/C
Not Used
ACC
Not Used
Rear Accessory Socket
STS
ACM
IMA
DrivebyWire
Ignition Coil
Day Light
LAF Heater
Radio
Interior Light
Back-Up Lights
Door Lock
Front Accessory Socket
Fuse Locations
254
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
06/08/08 14:56:55 31SDR620_259
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
−
−
If your vehicle needs to be towed,
call a professional towing service or
an organization. Never tow your
vehicle with just a rope or chain. It is
very dangerous.
Therearetwowaystotowyour
vehicle:
The operator
loads your vehicle on the back of a
truck.
Release the parking brake.
Start the engine.
ShifttoD,thentoN.
Turn off the engine.
Leave the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) position so the
steering wheel does not lock.
The tow
truck uses two pivoting arms that go
under the tires (front) and lift them
off the ground. The other two tires
remain on the ground.
If, due to damage, your vehicle must
be towed with the front wheels on
the ground, do this:
CONTINUED
Flat-bed Equipment
Wheel-lif t Equipment
This is the best way to
transport your vehicle.
This is an
acceptable way to tow your
vehicle.
Emergency Towing
Taking Care of the Unexpected
255
Improper towing preparation will
damage the transmission. Follow the
above procedure exactly. If you cannot
shift the transmission or start the
engine, your vehicle must be
transported with the front wheels off
the ground.
06/08/08 14:57:06 31SDR620_260
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
With the front wheels on the ground,
it is best to tow the vehicle no farther
than 50 miles (80 km), and keep the
speedbelow35mph(55km/h).
If your vehicle is equipped with a
front spoiler, remove it before
towing so it is not damaged.
Emergency Towing
256
The steering system can be damaged if
the steering wheel is locked. Leave the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)
position, and make sure the steering
wheel turns freely before you begin
towing.
Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the
bumpers will cause serious damage.
The bumpers are not designed to
support the vehicle’s weight.
06/08/08 14:57:12 31SDR620_261
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Thediagramsinthissectiongive
you the dimensions and capacities of
your vehicle and the locations of the
identification numbers. It also
includes information you should
know about your vehicle’s tires and
emissions control systems.
................Identification Numbers . 258
................................Specifications . 260
DOT Tire Quality Grading
.....................(U.S.Vehicles) .262
Uniform Tire Quality
..................................Grading . 262
.................................Treadwear . 262
......................................Traction . 262
.............................Temperature . 263
.................................Tire Labeling . 264
.......................Emissions Controls . 265
.....................The Clean Air Act . 265
Crankcase Emissions Control
....................................System . 265
Evaporative Emissions Control
....................................System . 265
Onboard Refueling Vapor
................................Recovery . 265
...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 266
....................PGM-FI System . 266
Ignition Timing Control
................................System . 266
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
...................(EGR) System . 266
Three Way Catalytic
...........................Converter . 266
....................Replacement Parts . 266
..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 267
..............State Emissions Testing . 268
Technical Information
Technical Information
257
06/08/08 14:57:16 31SDR620_262
Main Menu
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
background
Your vehicle has several identifying
numbers in various places.
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
dealer uses to register your vehicle
for warranty purposes. It is also
necessary for licensing and insuring
your vehicle. The easiest place to
find the VIN is on a plate fastened to
the top of the dashboard. You can
seeitbylookingthroughthe
windshield on the driver’s side. It is
also on the certification label
attached to the driver’s doorjamb,
and is stamped on the engine
compartment bulkhead. The VIN is
also provided in bar code on the
certification label.
Identification Numbers
258
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
CERTIFICATION LABEL
06/08/08 14:57:20 31SDR620_263
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
background
The transmission number is on a
label on top of the transmission.
The engine number is stamped on
the front of the engine block.
The IMA Motor Number is stamped
on the motor housing.
Identification Numbers
Technical Information
259
ENGINE NUMBER
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER
IMA MOTOR NUMBER
06/08/08 14:57:25 31SDR620_264
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
−−
＊
＊
＊
＊
Specifications
260
Dimensions
Weights
Air Conditioning
Capacities
Capacities
HFC-134a (R-134a)
17.6 19.4 oz (500 550 g)
107.9 in (2,740 mm)
61.1 in (1,553 mm)
61.2 in (1,554 mm)
Length
Width
Height
Wheelbase
Track
Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attached
to the driver’s doorjamb.
SE-10Y
Refrigerant type
Charge quantity
Lubricant type
Fuel tank
17.09 US gal (64.7 )
Engine
coolant
Engine oil
Automatic
transmission
fluid
Windshield
washer
reservoir
1.77 US gal (6.7
)
2.22 US gal (8.4
)
4.5 US qt (4.3
)
4.2 US qt (4.0
)
5.3 US qt (5.0 )
2.6 US qt (2.5 )
4.8 US qt (4.5 )
Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine
Reserve tank capacity: 0.16 US gal (0.6 )
Excluding the oil remaining in the engine
3.6 US qt (3.4 )
8.1 US qt (7.7 )
190.9 in (4,850 mm)
71.7 in (1,820 mm)
57.2 in (1,453 mm)
Approx.
Front
Rear
1:
2:
Change
Total
Change
Including
filter
Without
filter
Total
Change
Total
U.S.
Canada
1
2
06/08/08 14:57:40 31SDR620_265
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Specifications
Technical Information
261
Engine
Alignment
Tires
Lights
Battery
Fuses
12 V 60 W (HB3)
12 V 51 W (HB4)
12 V 21 W
12 V 24/2.2 CP
SOHC i-VTEC 6-cylinder (V6),
gasoline engine
3.39 x 3.39 in (86.0 x 86.0 mm)
182.8 cu-in (2,997 cm
)
10.5 : 1
IZFR6K-11
SKJ20DR-M11
Type
BorexStroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
Spark plugs
Toe-in
Camber
Caster
0.00 in (0.0 mm)
0.08 in (2.0 mm)
0°
1°
3°15’
Size
Pressure
P215/60R16 94V
T135/80D16
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm
)
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm
)
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm
)
Headlights
Front side marker/Parking/
Turn signal light
Rear turn signal lights
Back-up lights
License plate light
Front ceiling lights
Center ceiling light
Trunk light
Door courtesy light
Vanity mirror lights
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
21 W
3CP
8W
8W
5W
2CP
2W
Capacity
Interior
Under-hood
12 V 52 AH/5 HR
See page 254 or the fuse label
attached to the inside of the fuse
box door on each side of the
dashboard.
See page 253 or the fuse box
cover.
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
High
Low
NGK:
DENSO:
Front/Rear
Spare
Front
Rear
Spare
(Amber)
(Amber)
06/08/08 14:58:01 31SDR620_266
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
−
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between the tread shoulder and the
maximum section width. For
example:
The treadwear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-
half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual condi-
tions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices, and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assignedtothistireisbasedon
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
The tires on your vehicle meet all
U.S. Federal Safety Requirements.
All tires are also graded for
treadwear, traction, and temperature
performance according to
Department of Transportation
(DOT) standards. The following
explains these gradings.
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
Treadwear Traction AA, A, B, C
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
262
06/08/08 14:58:10 31SDR620_267
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
− Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Temperature A,B,C
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Technical Information
263
06/08/08 14:58:15 31SDR620_268
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Rim diameter in inches.
Load index (a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry).
Speed symbol (an
alphabetical code indicating
the maximum speed rating).
The tires that came on your vehicle
have a number of markings. Those
you should be aware of are described
below.
Whenever tires are replaced, they
should be replaced with tires of the
same size. Following is an example
of tire size with an explanation of
what each component means.
Vehicletype(Pindicates
passenger vehicle).
Tire width in millimeters.
Aspect ratio (the tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width).
Tire construction code (R
indicates radial).
The tire identification number (TIN)
is a group of numbers and letters
that look like the following example
TIN. TIN is located on the sidewall
of the tire.
The maximum load the
tire can carry at
maximum air pressure.
The maximum air
pressurethetirecan
hold.
Tire type code.
Date of manufacture.
Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
This indicates that the tire
meets all requirements of
the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
P
R
V
16
DOT
B97R
FW6X
2202
205
60
91
Max Press
Max Load
Tire Identification Number
Tire Size
Maximum Tire Load
Maximum Tire Pressure
Tire Labeling
264
P205/60R16 91V
DOT B97R FW6X 2202
06/08/08 14:58:32 31SDR620_269
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
＊
＊
The burning of gasoline in your
vehicle’s engine produces several by-
products. Some of these are carbon
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen
(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).
Gasoline evaporating from the tank
also produces hydrocarbons. Con-
trolling the production of NOx, CO,
and HC is important to the environ-
ment. Under certain conditions of
sunlight and climate, NOx and HC
react to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’
Carbon monoxide does not contri-
bute to smog creation, but it is a
poisonous gas.
The United States Clean Air Act
sets standards for automobile
emissions. It also requires that
automobile manufacturers explain to
owners how their emissions controls
workandwhattodotomaintain
them. This section summarizes how
the emissions controls work.
In Canada, Honda vehicles comply
with the Canadian emission
requirements, as specified in an
agreement with Environment
Canada, at the time they are
manufactured.
Your vehicle has a positive
crankcase ventilation system. This
keeps gasses that build up in the
engine’s crankcase from going into
the atmosphere. The positive
crankcase ventilation valve routes
them from the crankcase back to the
intake manifold. They are then
drawn into the engine and burned.
As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
tank, an evaporative emissions
control canister filled with charcoal
adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
canister while the engine is off. After
the engine is started and warmed up,
the vapor is drawn into the engine
and burned during driving.
The onboard refueling vapor
recovery (ORVR) system captures
the fuel vapors during refueling. The
vapors are adsorbed in a canister
filled with activated carbon. While
driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
into the engine and burned off.
The Clean Air Act
Crankcase Emissions Control
System
Evaporative Emissions Control
System
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery
Emissions Controls
Technical Information
265
06/08/08 14:58:42 31SDR620_270
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
The exhaust emissions controls
include four systems: PGM-FI,
ignition timing control, exhaust gas
recirculation, and three way catalytic
converter. These four systems work
together to control the engine’s
combustion and minimize the
amount of HC, CO, and NOx that
come out the tailpipe. The exhaust
emissions control systems are
separate from the crankcase and
evaporative emissions control
systems.
The emissions control systems are
designed and certified to work to-
gether in reducing emissions to
levels that comply with the Clean Air
Act. To make sure the emissions
remain low, you should use only new
Honda replacement parts or their
equivalent for repairs. Using lower
quality parts may increase the
emissions from your vehicle.
The emissions control systems are
covered by warranties separate from
the rest of your vehicle. Read your
warranty manual for more informa-
tion.The PGM-FI system uses sequential
multiport fuel injection.
It has three subsystems: air intake,
engine control, and fuel control. The
powertrain control module (PCM)
uses various sensors to determine
how much air is going into the
engine. It then controls how much
fuel to inject under all operating
conditions.
This system constantly adjusts the
ignition timing, reducing the amount
of HC, CO, and NOx produced.
The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)
system takes some of the exhaust
gas and routes it back into the intake
manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the
air/fuel mixture reduces the amount
of NOx produced when the fuel is
burned.
The three way catalytic converter is
in the exhaust system. Through
chemical reactions, it converts HC,
CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
to carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen
(N ), and water vapor.
2
2
Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts
PGM-FI System
Ignition Timing Control System
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
System
Three Way Catalytic Converter
Emissions Controls
266
06/08/08 14:58:55 31SDR620_271
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
The three way catalytic converter
contains precious metals that serve
as catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converter is referred to
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Honda part
or its equivalent.
Always use unleaded gasoline.
Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converter ineffective.
The three way catalytic converter
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take
place. It can set on fire any
combustible materials that come
near it. Park your vehicle away from
high grass, dry leaves, or other
flammables.
A defective three way catalytic
converter contributes to air pollution,
and can impair your engine’s per-
formance. Follow these guidelines to
protect your vehicle’s three way
catalytic converter.
Keep the engine well maintained.
Have your vehicle diagnosed and
repaired if it is misfiring, back-
firing, stalling, or otherwise not
running properly.
Three Way Catalytic Converter
Technical Information
267
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERS
06/08/08 14:59:02 31SDR620_272
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Make sure the gas tank is nearly,
but not completely, full (around
3/4).
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, start the engine, and let it
idle for 20 seconds.
If you take your vehicle for a state
emissions test shortly after the
battery has been disconnected or
gone dead, it may not pass the test.
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that must be set in the on-
board diagnostics for the emissions
systems. These codes are erased
when the battery is disconnected,
and set again only after several days
of driving under a variety of
conditions.
If the testing facility determines that
the readiness codes are not set, you
will be requested to return at a later
date to complete the test. If you must
get the vehicle retested within the
next two or three days, you can
condition the vehicle for retesting by
doing the following.
Keep the vehicle in Park. Increase
the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and
hold it there until the temperature
gauge rises to at least 1/4 of the
scale (about 3 minutes).
Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 6
hours or more.
Make sure the ambient
temperature is between 40° and
95°F.
Testing of Readiness Codes
State Emissions Testing
268
06/08/08 14:59:11 31SDR620_273
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
Then drive in city/suburban
traffic for at least 10 minutes.
When traffic conditions allow, let
the vehicle coast for several
seconds without using the
accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal.
Select a nearby lightly traveled
major highway where you can
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph
for at least 20 minutes. Drive on
the highway in D. Do not use the
cruise control. When traffic allows,
drive for 90 seconds without
moving the accelerator pedal.
(Vehicle speed may vary slightly;
this is okay.) If you cannot do this
for a continuous 90 seconds
because of traffic conditions, drive
for at least 30 seconds, then repeat
it two more times (for a total of 90
seconds).
If the testing facility determines the
readiness codes are still not set, see
your dealer.
Stop the vehicle, turn off the
ignition switch, and leave it off for
30 minutes.
State Emissions Testing
Technical Information
269
06/08/08 14:59:16 31SDR620_274
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
▲
▼
background
....Customer Service Information . 272
....................Warranty Coverages . 273
Reporting Safety Defects
............................(U.S. Vehicle) . 274
.....................Authorized Manuals . 275
Warranty and Customer Relations
Warranty and Customer Relations
271
06/08/08 14:59:22 31SDR620_276
Main Menu
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
background
Honda dealership personnel are
trained professionals. They should
be able to answer all your questions.
If you encounter a problem that your
dealership does not solve to your
satisfaction, please discuss it with
the dealership’s management. The
service manager or general manager
can help. Almost all problems are
solved in this way.
If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership’s
management, contact your Honda
Customer Service Office.
U.S. Owners:
Canadian Owners:
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands:
When you call or write, please give
us this information:
Vehicle identification number (see
page )
Name and address of the dealer
who services your vehicle
Date of purchase
Mileage on your vehicle
Your name, address, and
telephone number
A detailed description of the
problem
Name of the dealer who sold the
vehicle to you
258
Customer Service Information
272
CUSTOMER RELATIONS
RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÉLE
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Automobile Customer Service
Mail Stop 500-2N-7A
1919 Torrance Boulevard
Torrance, California 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 999-1009
Honda Canada Inc.
715 Milner Avenue
Toronto, ON
M1B 2K8
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909
Toronto (416) 287-4776
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Tel: (787) 620-7546
06/08/08 14:59:30 31SDR620_277
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
background
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Your new vehicle is covered by these
warranties:
covers your new vehicle, except for
the battery, emissions control
systems, and accessories, against
defects in materials and
workmanship.
provides prorated
coverage for a replacement battery
purchased from your dealer.
these two
warranties cover your vehicle’s
emissions control systems. Time,
mileage, and coverage are
conditional. Please read your
warranty booklet for exact
information.
provides
coverageforaslongasthepur-
chaser of the muffler owns the
vehicle.
this warranty gives up
to 100 % credit toward a replacement
battery.
a seat
belt that fails to function properly is
covered by a limited warranty.
Please read your warranty booklet
for details.
covers all Honda
replacement parts against defects in
materials and workmanship.
Honda accessories are covered
under this warranty. Time and
mileage limits depend on the type of
accessory and other factors. Please
read your warranty booklet for
details.
all exterior body panels are
covered for rust-through from the
inside for the specified time period
with no mileage limit.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to
all these warranties. Please read the
2007 Honda warranty information
booklet that came with your vehicle
for precise information on warranty
coverages. Your vehicle’s original
tires are covered by their
manufacturer. Tire warranty
information is in a separate booklet.
Please refer to the 2007 warranty
manual that came with your vehicle.
Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners
Canadian Owners
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Replacement Battery Limited
Warranty
Emissions Control Systems Defects
Warranty and Emissions
Performance Warranty
Replacement Muffler Lifetime
Limited Warranty
Original Equipment Battery Limited
Warranty
Seat Belt Limited Warranty
Replacement Parts Limited
Warranty
Accessory Limited Warranty
Rust Perf oration Limited Warranty
Warranty and Customer Relations
273
06/08/08 14:59:43 31SDR620_278
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
If NHTSA receives similar com-
plaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA), in addition
to notifying American Honda Motor
Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
VehicleSafetyHotlinetoll-freeat
1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh
Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from .
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
274
http://www.safercar.gov
http://www.safercar.gov
06/08/08 14:59:49 31SDR620_279
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
Table of Contents
background
−
＊
＊
＊
＊
２
０
０
７
Ｈ
Ｏ
Ｎ
The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm
Incorporated. You can order in any of three ways:
Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this page
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356
Go online at
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.
at 1-800-782-4356.
(credit card orders only)
Valid only for sales within the United States. Canadian
owners should contact their authorized Honda dealer.
Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)
Authorized Manuals
275
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356
OR
(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)
MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00
Price
Each
$75.00
$50.00
$44.00
$44.00
$35.00
$29.00
$12.00
$12.00
FREE
Publication
Form Number
61SDR02
61SDR02EL
61SDA30
61SDR31
31SDR620
31SDR800
31SDRM20
31SDRQ20
HON-R
Form Description
2005-2007 Honda Accord Hybrid
Service Manual
2005-2007 Honda Accord Hybrid
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual
2003 Model Series Honda Accord 2/4 door
Body Repair Manual
2005 Model Series Honda Accord Hybrid
Body Repair Manual Supplement
2007 Honda Accord Hybrid
Navigation System Owner’s Manual
2007 Honda Accord Hybrid
Honda Service History
Order Form for Previous Years-
Indicate Year and Model Desired
2007 Honda Accord Hybrid Owner’s Manual
2007 Honda Accord Hybrid Quick Start Guide
PUBLICATION NUMBER
VEHICLE MODEL
Name Year
Qty
Price
Each
Total
Price
GRAND TOTAL
HANDLING CHARGE
Mich. Purchases
Add 6% Sales Tax
TOTAL MATERIAL
$6.95
Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST
By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You can
pay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail to
Helm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.
Prices are subject to change without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Orders are mailed within 10 days. Please
allow adequate time for delivery.
Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation.
www. helminc. com
06/08/08 15:00:01 31SDR620_280
Main Menu
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
background
−
−
−
Ｓ
Ｈ
Ｉ
Ｐ
Ｔ
Ｏ
Ｐ
Ａ
Ｙ
Ｍ
Ｅ
Ｎ
Ｔ
This manual covers maintenance and recommended
procedures for repair to engine and chassis components.
It is written for the journeyman mechanic, but is simple
enough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-
stand.
This manual complements the service manual by
providing in-depth troubleshooting information for each
electrical circuit in your vehicle.
This manual describes the procedures involved in the
replacement of damaged body parts.
Authorized Manuals
Service Manual:
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
Body Repair Manual:
276
NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,
and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment should
be sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shown
below for a quotation.
P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356
Customer Name
Attention
Apartment Number
State & Zip Code
City
Daytime Telephone Number
Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc U.S. funds only.
Do not send cash
Master
Card
VISA Check here if your billing address is different
from the shipping address shown above.
Account Number
Expiration: Mo. Yr.
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE
DATE
Street Address No P.O. Box Number
()
These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14
days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.
06/08/08 15:00:10 31SDR620_281
Main Menu
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
background
CONTINUED
....................................Accessories . 162
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key
.......................................Position) . 83
.............Accessory Power Socket . 100
....................Additives, Engine Oil . 204
.............................Airbag (SRS) . 11, 24
..........Airbag System Components . 24
............................Air Conditioning . 106
.........................................Usage . 108
...............Air Intake, IMA Battery . 167
.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 224
..................Air Vent, IMA Battery . 167
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
...............................Indicator . 61, 181
...................................Operation . 181
.Anti-theft Steering Column Lock . 83
............................................Armrest . 89
................................Audio System . 118
................................Auto Idle Stop . 177
...............Auto Idle Stop Indicator . 178
.............Automatic Speed Control . 147
..............Automatic Transmission . 172
..........................Capacity, Fluid . 260
.......................................Shifting . 172
.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 172
................Shift Lever Positions . 172
....................Shift Lock Release . 175
Battery
Charging System
...........................Indicator . 60, 245
............................Jump Starting . 241
..............................Maintenance . 229
............................Specifications . 261
..............................Before Driving . 155
..................................Belts, Seat . 10, 20
....................................Booster Seat . 51
Brakes
...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 181
.............Break-in, New Linings . 156
...........................................Fluid . 211
.........................................Parking . 98
.................System Indicator . 60, 247
........................Wear Indicators . 180
.............................Braking System . 180
........................Break-in, New Car . 156
..Brightness Control, Instruments . 78
........................Brights, Headlights . 76
Bulb Replacement
................Front Parking Lights . 216
.........................Headlights . 214, 215
............................Specifications . 261
....................Turn Signal Lights . 216
..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 213
............................Capacities Chart . 260
.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 54
.............................Carrying Cargo . 164
.............CAUTION, Explanation of . iii
.......................................CD Player . 125
..........................Error Message . 131
........................Certification Label . 258
............................................Chains . 228
....................Changing a Flat Tire . 235
Changing Oil
........................................How to . 205
......................................When to . 193
....................Charge/Assist Gauge . 72
...Charging System Indicator . 60, 245
..............Check Fuel Cap Message . 73
Index
A
B
C
INDEX
I
06/08/08 15:00:16 31SDR620_282
Main Menu
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
background
............Checklist, Before Driving . 170
..................Childproof Door Locks . 85
............................Child Seats . 36, 43-49
...........Lower Anchorage Points . 45
..........Tether Anchorage Points . 49
..............Climate Control Sensors . 117
.........................Clock, Setting the . 145
......................................Coat Hook . 103
..................CO in the Exhaust . 54, 265
............Cold Weather, Starting in . 171
..............................Compact Spare . 234
.................Console Compartment . 101
.................Consumer Information . 272
.............Controls, Instruments and . 57
Coolant
........................................Adding . 207
....................................Checking . 160
.........................Proper Solution . 207
...................Temperature Gauge . 72
Crankcase Emissions Control
........................................System . 265
............Cruise Control Operation . 147
.............Customer Service Office . 272
...............DANGER, Explanation of . iii
...................................Dashboard . 4, 58
................Daytime Running Lights . 78
............Defects, Reporting Safety . 274
................Defogger, Rear Window . 79
....................................Dimensions . 260
...............Dimming the Headlights . 76
Dipstick
..........Automatic Transmission . 210
..................................Engine Oil . 159
..........................Directional Signals . 76
........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 180
.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 206
Doors
..............Locking and Unlocking . 84
..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 262
...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 7
...........................................Driving . 169
....................................Economy . 161
..........Dual Temperature Control . 115
..............................Economy, Fuel . 161
Electric Power Steering (EPS)
.......................................Indicator . 66
............Emergencies on the Road . 233
.............Battery, Jump Starting . 241
...........Brake System Indicator . 247
................Changing a Flat Tire . 235
.....Charging System Indicator . 245
..................Checking the Fuses . 249
.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 245
...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 246
..................Overheated Engine . 243
...........................Emergency Brake . 98
......................Emergency Flashers . 79
......................Emergency Towing . 255
.......................Emissions Controls . 265
Engine
....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 72
Malfunction Indicator
................................Lamp . 60, 246
..............Oil Pressure Indicator . 245
..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 203
...............................Overheating . 243
............................Specifications . 261
............................Speed Limiter . 174
................................Starting . 83, 171
...................Engine Speed Limiter . 174
Index
D
E
II
06/08/08 15:00:22 31SDR620_283
Main Menu
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
background
CONTINUED
.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 265
...............................Exhaust Fumes . 54
Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat
........................................Belts by . 18
...................................Fan, Interior . 108
.........................................Features . 105
....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 157
........................................Filter, Oil . 205
.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 79
......................Flat Tire, Changing . 235
.......................................Floor Mat . 219
Fluids
..........Automatic Transmission . 210
..........................................Brake . 211
..................Windshield Washer . 209
..........................Four-way Flashers . 79
.................................................Fuel . 156
...............................Cap Message . 73
.....................Economy Indicator . 66
......................Fill Door and Cap . 157
...........................................Gauge . 73
................Octane Requirement . 156
........................Tank, Filling the . 157
.....................Fuses, Checking the . 249
...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 161
.........................................Gasoline . 156
...........................................Gauge . 73
................Octane Requirement . 156
........................Tank, Filling the . 157
................Gas Station Procedures . 157
Gauges
...Engine Coolant Temperature . 72
...............................................Fuel . 73
Gearshift Lever Positions
..........Automatic Transmission . 172
......................................Glove Box . 102
.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 213
..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 79
........................................Headlights . 76
........................................Aiming . 213
..............Automatic Lighting Off . 77
............Daytime Running Lights . 78
............Low Beams, Turning on . 76
.........................Reminder Chime . 76
........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 213
...................................Turning on . 76
..............................Head Restraints . 92
.....................Heating and Cooling . 106
HomeLink Universal
................................Transceiver . 150
..Hood, Opening and Closing the . 158
...Identification Number, Vehicle . 258
Ignition
..............................................Keys . 81
...........................................Switch . 83
............Timing Control System . 266
....................IMA System Indicator . 66
........................Immobilizer System . 82
.........Important Safety Precautions . 8
.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 59
...............................Infant Restraint . 41
......................................Infant Seats . 41
..........Tether Anchorage Points . 49
...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 223
Index
F
G
H
I
INDEX
III
06/08/08 15:00:30 31SDR620_284
Main Menu
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
background
...................................Inside Mirror . 93
.............................Inspection, Tire . 225
....................Installing a Child Seat . 44
..........Tether Anchorage Points . 49
.............................Using LATCH . 45
............................Instrument Panel . 59
........Instrument Panel Brightness . 78
........................................Introduction . i
.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 235
.......................................Jack, Tire . 235
................................Jump Starting . 241
..................................................Keys . 81
.......................Label, Certification . 258
.................Lane Change, Signaling . 76
........................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 21
Lights
....................Bulb Replacement . 213
.......................................Indicator . 63
.........................................Parking . 76
............................Turn Signal . 63, 76
....................................Load Limits . 165
......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 83
Locks
.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 83
............................Fuel Fill Door . 157
..................................Glove Box . 102
....................Lockout Prevention . 84
.................................Power Door . 84
...........................................Trunk . 88
........................Low Coolant Level . 160
...Lower Gear, Downshifting to a . 172
...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 60, 245
...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 260
.........................................Luggage . 164
..................................Maintenance . 191
Owner’s Maintenance
...................................Checks . 198
........................................Record . 200
.........................Minder Indicator . 65
..........................................Safety . 192
................................Minder . 193-199
.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 60, 246
...............................Meters, Gauges . 67
..........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 93
.................................Modifications . 163
.........................................Moonroof . 97
...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 156
.........................................Odometer . 68
Oil
........................Change, How to . 205
...............Change, When to . 193-199
......................Checking Engine . 159
..............Pressure Indicator . 60, 245
Selecting Proper Viscosity
......................................Chart . 203
...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 83
...................Neutral Gear Position . 173
..................New Vehicle Break-in . 156
...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i
...............Numbers, Identification . 258
Index
J
K
L
M
N
O
IV
06/08/08 15:00:39 31SDR620_285
Main Menu
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
background
CONTINUED
................................Safety Belts . 10, 20
............Safety Defects, Reporting . 274
.................................Safety Features . 9
.........................................Airbags . 11
.....................................Seat Belts . 10
.............Safety Labels, Location of . 55
..............................Safety Messages . iii
................................Satellite Radio . 137
.........................................Seat Belts . 10
...............Additional Information . 20
Automatic Seat Belt
...............................Tensioners . 22
......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 21
................................Maintenance . 23
Reminder Indicator and
................................Beeper . 20, 60
...................System Components . 20
...............Use During Pregnancy . 18
...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 16
........................Seats, Adjusting the . 90
............................Security System . 146
.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 43
..............................Outside Mirrors . 93
.....................Outside Temperature . 68
....................Overheating, Engine . 243
....Owner’s Maintenance Checks . 198
..............Panel Brightness Control . 78
........................Park Gear Position . 173
.................................Parking Brake . 98
.................................Parking Lights . 76
Parking Over Things that
....................................Burn . 179, 267
..................................Parking Tips . 179
.............................PGM-FI System . 266
....................Power Mirror Heaters . 94
.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 18
.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 13
...Additional Safety Precautions . 19
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 18
........................Protecting Children . 36
Protecting Infants and Small
.......................................Children . 41
...........Protecting Larger Children . 50
.....................Using Booster Seat . 51
...................Radiator Overheating . 243
Radio/CD Sound
........................................System . 118
Rear Lights, Bulb
......................Replacement . 217, 218
............................Rear View Mirror . 93
.................Rear Window Defogger . 79
.........Reclining the Seat Backs . 90, 91
.............................Reminder Lights . 59
.......................Remote Transmitter . 85
Replacement Information
................Engine Oil and Filter . 205
..........................................Fuses . 249
................................Light Bulbs . 213
................................Minder . 193-199
...........................................Tires . 226
.............................Wiper Blades . 221
Replacing Seat Belts After a
............................................Crash . 23
.........Reserve Tank, Coolant . 160, 207
...............................Restraint, Child . 36
..................Reverse Gear Position . 173
................................Rotation, Tire . 226
Index
P
RS
INDEX
V
06/08/08 15:00:45 31SDR620_286
Main Menu
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
background
.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 233
Technical Descriptions
......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 262
.....Emissions Control Systems . 265
Three Way Catalytic
...............................Converter . 267
.......................Temperature Gauge . 72
..............Tether Anchorage Points . 49
..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 267
..........................Time, Setting the . 145
....................................Timing Belt . 212
....................................Tire Chains . 228
.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 235
.................................Tire Labeling . 264
...............................................Tires . 223
..............................Air Pressure . 224
.........................Checking Wear . 225
..........................Compact Spare . 234
......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 262
......................................Inflation . 223
..................................Inspection . 225
...................................Replacing . 226
......................................Rotating . 226
...........................................Snow . 227
.........................Select/Reset Knob . 78
...............................Serial Number . 258
....................Service Intervals . 193-199
.............................Service Manual . 275
...........Service Station Procedure . 157
..........................Setting the Clock . 145
.....Shift Lever Position Indicator . 172
........................Shift Lock Release . 175
..............................Side Airbags . 11, 29
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 29
How the Side Airbag Off
......................Indicator Works . 32
................Side Curtain Airbags . 11, 31
How Your Side Curtain
..........................Airbags Work . 31
...............................Signaling Turns . 76
.....................................Snow Tires . 227
................................Sound System . 118
Spare Tire
......................................Inflating . 234
............................Specifications . 261
....................Specifications Charts . 260
................................Speed Control . 147
................................Speed Limiter . 174
..........SRS, Additional Information . 24
...Additional Safety Precautions . 35
.............................Airbag Service . 34
How the SRS Indicator
.......................................Works . 31
How Your Front Airbags
.......................................Works . 26
How Your Side Airbags
.......................................Works . 29
........................SRS Components . 24
.............................SRS Indicator . 31, 61
....START (Ignition Key Position) . 83
.......................Starting the Engine . 171
................With a Dead Battery . 241
........Steam Coming from Engine . 243
Steering Wheel
..................................Adjustment . 80
.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 83
...................Stereo Sound System . 118
..........................................Sun Visor . 99
........................Sunglasses Holder . 102
Supplemental Restraint
................................System . 11, 24
......................................Servicing . 34
.........................SRS Indicator . 31, 61
...................System Components . 24
..................................Synthetic Oil . 204
Index
T
VI
06/08/08 15:00:50 31SDR620_287
Main Menu
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
background
............................Specifications . 261
...................Tools, Tire Changing . 235
Towing
.....................................A Trailer . 185
................Emergency Wrecker . 255
Transmission
Checking Fluid Level,
..............................Automatic . 210
...........................Fluid Selection . 211
..............Identification Number . 259
.............Shifting the Automatic . 172
.....................................Treadwear . 225
.......................................Trip Meter . 69
................................................Trunk . 88
....................Emergency Opener . 89
.................................Opening the . 88
.............Open Monitor Indicator . 62
....................................Turn Signals . 76
Unexpected, Taking Care
..........................................of the . 233
....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 262
........................Unleaded Gasoline . 156
.....................Upholstery Cleaning . 219
.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 206
..................................Vanity Mirror . 99
.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 165
......................Vehicle Dimensions . 260
....Vehicle Identification Number . 258
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)
....................................System . 183
............Activation Indicator . 62, 183
..................................Off Switch . 184
.................System Indicator . 62, 183
.............................Vehicle Storage . 230
.................................................VIN . 258
..................................Viscosity, Oil . 203
...........Voice Control System . 108, 119
............WARNING, Explanation of . iii
.........Warning Labels, Location of . 55
....................Warranty Coverages . 273
Washer, Windshield
........Checking the Fluid Level . 209
.....................................Operation . 75
Wheels
...............Adjusting the Steering . 80
............Alignment and Balance . 225
..........Aluminum Alloy Wheels . 223
.....................................Cleaning . 223
..........................Compact Spare . 234
......................................Wrench . 235
Windows
..................Operating the Power . 94
...........................Rear, Defogger . 79
Windshield
.......................................Cleaning . 75
.......................................Washers . 75
Wipers, Windshield
.......................Changing Blades . 221
.....................................Operation . 75
....................................Worn Tires . 225
.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 255
Index
U
V
W
INDEX
VII
06/08/08 15:00:56 31SDR620_288
Main Menu
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼
background
Service Information Summary
Gasoline:
Fuel Tank Capacity:
Recommended Engine Oil:
Brake Fluid:
Tire Pressure:
Automatic Transmission Fluid:
SpareTirePressure:
17.09 US gal (64.7
)
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane
number of 87 or higher.
API Premium grade 5W-20
detergent oil (see page ).
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
replacement (see page ).
Oil change capacity (including
filter):
4.5 US qt (4.3
)
Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic
Transmission Fluid) preferred, or
aDEXRON
III ATF as a
temporary replacement (see
pages and ).
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm
)
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm
)
196
203 204
204
06/08/08 15:01:17 31SDR620_293
Main Menu
s
t
▲
▼
▲
▼

Specifications

Indexed Terms: Honda Accord

Honda ACCORD HYBRID 2007 Questions and Answers

Find answers or ask new question.
Questions and Answers

Related Products

Product Vevor NT 1604 image
Vevor NT-1604 Class 3 Trailer Hitch Tow Hitch with 2" Receiver for 2020-2024 Honda RAV4
2026-05-10 1 docs
Product Vevor NT 1601 image
Vevor NT-1601 Class 3 Trailer Hitch Tow Hitch with 2" Receiver for 2012-2016 Honda CR-V
2026-05-10 1 docs
Product DK2 86109 image
DK2 86109 Custom Mount Kit Isuzu Rodeo '98-'05, Honda Passport '98-'02
2026-05-08 1 docs
Product DK2 86108 image
DK2 86108 Custom Mount Kit Isuzu Trooper '98-'05, Honda Acura SLX '98-'99
2026-05-08 1 docs
Product DK2 86106 image
DK2 86106 Custom Mount Kit Honda Acura SLX '96-'97, Passport '92-'97
2026-05-08 1 docs
Product Vevor CHQ03 07 image
Vevor CHQ03-07 Direct Fit Catalytic Converter With Gaskets Fit Honda Accord 2003-2007 2.4l
2026-05-04 1 docs